Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 586

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation
Maintenance
Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-


lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be
carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-


tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE
YOUR HYUNDAI WARNING
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. This manual includes information titled as DAN-
Such modifications may adversely affect the per- GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI These titles indicate the following:
and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limit-
ed warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifi-
cations may also be in violation of regulations DANGER
established by the U.S. Department of DANGER indicates a hazardous situation
Transportation and other federal or state agencies. which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

WARNING
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR WARNING indicates a hazardous situation
TELEPHONE INSTALLATION which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec-
tion and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio CAUTION
or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation
carefully follow the radio manufacturer’s instructions which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary moderate injury.
measures or special instructions if you choose to
install one of these devices. NOTICE
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

F2
HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY
Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,
generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain
how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.

You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:
https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx
If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer
Connect Center at:

Hyundai Motor America/Phoenix


P.O. Box 83835
Phoenix, AZ 85071-3835
800-633-5151
consumeraffairs@hmausa.com

Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,
between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST
(English).
For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday
through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.

F3
INTRODUCTION

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis-
tinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc-
tion of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-
trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI deal-
ers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you
can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with impor-
tant operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2016 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.

F4
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine 2. Why should you use genuine 3. How can you tell if you are pur-
Parts? parts? chasing HYUNDAI Genuine
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are Parts?
same parts used by HYUNDAI engineered and built to meet rigid Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Motor Company to manufacture manufacturing requirements. Parts Logo on the package (see
vehicles. They are designed and Damage caused by using imita- below).
tested for the optimum safety, per- tion, counterfeit or used salvage HYUNDAI Genuine Parts export-
formance, and reliability for our parts is not covered under the ed to the U.S. are packaged with
customers. HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited labels written only in English.
Warranty or any other HYUNDAI
warranty. HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized
In addition, any damage to or fail- HYUNDAI Dealerships.
ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or fail-
ure of an imitation, counterfeit or
used salvage part is not covered
by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

F5
Introduction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL SAFETY MESSAGES


We want to help you get the greatest Your safety, and the safety of others, Throughout this manual DANGER,
possible driving pleasure from your is very important. This Owner's WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can Manual provides you with many safe- the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
assist you in many ways. To gain an ty precautions and operating proce- be used.
overview of the contents of your dures. This information alerts you to This is the safety alert sym-
Owner's Manual, use the Table of potential hazards that may hurt you bol. It is used to alert you to
Contents in the front of the manual. or others, as well as damage to your potential physical injury haz-
The first page of each Chapter vehicle. ards. Obey all safety mes-
includes a detailed Table of Contents Safety messages found on vehicle sages that follow this symbol
of the topics in that Chapter. labels and in this manual describe to avoid possible injury or
To quickly locate information about these hazards and what to do to death. The safety alert sym-
your vehicle, use the Index in the avoid or reduce the risks. bol precedes the signal words
back of the manual. It is an alphabet- Warnings and instructions contained DANGER, WARNING and
ical list of what is in this manual and in this manual are for your safety. CAUTION.
the page number where it can be Failure to follow safety warnings and
found. instructions can lead to serious injury DANGER
For your convenience, we have or death.
incorporated tabs on the right-hand DANGER indicates a hazardous
page edges. These tabs are coded situation which, if not avoided,
with the Chapter titles to assist you will result in death or serious
with navigating through the manual. injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.

F6
Introduction

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new vehicle is designed to
CAUTION obtain maximum performance with WARNING
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
CAUTION indicates a hazardous mize exhaust emissions and spark • Do not "top off" after the noz-
situation which, if not avoided, plug fouling. zle automatically shuts off
could result in minor or moder- when refueling.
ate injury. • Always check that the fuel cap
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane is installed securely to pre-
NOTICE number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research vent fuel spillage in the event
Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not of an accident.
NOTICE indicates a situation use methanol blended fuels)
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage. NOTICE Gasoline containing alcohol or
methanol
To prevent damage to the engine
and engine components, never Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
add any fuel system cleaning ethanol (also known as grain alco-
agents to the fuel tank other than hol) are being marketed along with or
what has been specified. instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-
line. For example, "E15" is a gasohol
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI comprised of 15% ethanol and 85%
dealer for additional information. gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine con-
trol system and emission control sys-
tem.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
F7
Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- Using Fuel Additives (except Gasoline containing MMT
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 Detergent Fuel Additives) Some gasoline contains harmful
percent gasoline, and is manufac- Using fuel additives such as: manganese-based fuel additives
tured exclusively for use in Flexible such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compati- - Silicone fuel additive
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
ble with your vehicle. Use of "E85" - Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
may result in poor engine perform- HYUNDAI does not recommend the
- Other metallic-based fuel additives use of gasoline containing MMT.
ance and damage to your vehicle's may result in cylinder misfire, poor
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
acceleration, engine stalling, dam- performance and affect your emis-
recommends that customers do not age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-
use fuel with an ethanol content sion control system.
rosion, and may cause damage to
exceeding 15 percent. the engine resulting in a reduction in The malfunction indicator lamp on
the overall life of the powertrain. the cluster may come on.
NOTICE
- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
To prevent damage to your vehicle’s (MIL) may illuminate. Detergent Fuel Additives
engine and fuel system: HYUNDAI recommends that you use
• Never use gasohol which con- NOTICE good quality gasolines treated with
tains methanol. detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Damage to the fuel system or per- Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-
• Never use gasohol containing formance problem caused by the
more than 15% ethanol. vent deposit formation in the engine.
use of these fuels or fuel additives These gasolines will help the engine
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded may not be covered by your New run cleaner and enhance performance
gasohol. Vehicle Limited Warranty. of the Emission Control System. For
• Never use "E85" fuel. more information on TOP TIER
Your New Vehicle Limited Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
Warranty does not cover damage website (www.toptiergas.com).
to the fuel system or any perform-
ance problems caused by the use
of "E85" fuel.

F8
Introduction

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS


For customers who do not use TOP • This vehicle should not be modi- By following a few simple precautions
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, fied. Modification of your vehicle for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
and have problems starting or the could affect its performance, safety may add to the performance, econo-
engine does not run smoothly, deter- or durability and may even violate my and life of your vehicle.
gent-based fuel additives that you governmental safety and emis- • Do not race the engine.
can purchase separately may be sions regulations.
added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER • While driving, keep your engine
In addition, damage or perform- speed (rpm, or revolutions per
Detergent Gasoline is not available, ance problems resulting from any
one bottle of additive added to the minute) between 2,000 rpm and
modification may not be covered 4,000 rpm.
fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or 12 under warranty.
months is recommended. • Do not maintain a single speed for
• If you use unauthorized electronic long periods of time, either fast or
Additives are available from your devices, it may cause the vehicle to
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along slow. Varying engine speed is need-
operate abnormally, wire damage, ed to properly break-in the engine.
with information on how to use them. battery discharge and fire. For your
Do not mix other additives. • Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
safety, do not use unauthorized
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
electronic devices.
properly.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.

F9
Introduction

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS


This vehicle is equipped with an These data can help provide a bet-
WARNING event data recorder (EDR). The ter understanding of the circum-
main purpose of an EDR is to stances in which crashes and
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 record, in certain crash or near injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
WARNING crash-like situations, such as an are recorded by your vehicle only
Items contained in motor vehi- air bag deployment or hitting a if a non-trivial crash situation
cles or emitted from them are road obstacle, data that will assist occurs; no data are recorded by
known to the State of California in understanding how a vehicle’s the EDR under normal driving
to cause cancer and birth systems performed. The EDR is conditions and no personal data
defects or reproductive harm. designed to record data related to (e.g., name, gender, age, and
These include: vehicle dynamics and safety sys- crash location) are recorded.
• Gasoline and its vapors tems for a short period of time, However, other parties, such as
typically 30 seconds or less. The law enforcement, could combine
• Engine exhaust EDR in this vehicle is designed to the EDR data with the type of per-
• Used engine oil record such data as: sonally identifying data routinely
• Interior passenger compart- • How various systems in your acquired during a crash investiga-
ment components and materi- vehicle were operating; tion.
als • Whether or not the driver and To read data recorded by an EDR,
• Component parts which are passenger safety belts were special equipment is required, and
subject to heat and wear buckled/ fastened; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
In addition, battery posts, termi- • How far (if at all) the driver was manufacturer, other parties, such
nals and related accessories depressing the accelerator as law enforcement, that have the
contain lead, lead compounds and/or brake pedal; and, special equipment, can read the
and other chemicals known to • How fast the vehicle was travel- information if they have access to
the State of California to cause ing. the vehicle or the EDR.
cancer and reproductive harm.

F10
Your vehicle at a glance 1

Safety system of your vehicle 2

Convenient features of your vehicle 3

Multimedia System 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Driving your vehicle 5

What to do in an emergency 6

Maintenance 7
Specifications, Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects 8

Index I

F11
1 Your vehicle at a glance Seat belts ..............................................................2-22
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-22
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-23
Exterior overview ..................................................1-2
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-25
Interior overview....................................................1-4 Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-31
Instrument panel overview ...................................1-5 Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-34
Engine compartment .............................................1-6 Child restraint system (CRS) ..............................2-35
Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-35
2 Safety system of your vehicle Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-36
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-38
Important safety precautions...............................2-2 Air bag -
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2 Advanced supplemental restraint system ........2-46
Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2 Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-48
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2 How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-51
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2 What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-56
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3 Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-57
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3 Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-62
Seats ........................................................................2-4 SRS Care............................................................................2-67
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5 Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-68
Front Seats .........................................................................2-6 Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-69
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12
Head Restraints ...............................................................2-15
Seat warmers ...................................................................2-19

F12
3 Convenient features of your vehicle Windows ................................................................3-43
Power Windows ...............................................................3-44
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4 Sunroof..................................................................3-47
Remote Key.........................................................................3-4 Sunroof Opening and Closing ......................................3-47
Smart Key............................................................................3-8 Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-47
Immobilizer System.........................................................3-12 Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-48
Sunshade...........................................................................3-49
Door Locks............................................................3-14
Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-49
Outside the Vehicle.........................................................3-14
Inside the Vehicle ............................................................3-15 Exterior Features.................................................3-51
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-17 Hood ...................................................................................3-51
Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-18 Trunk ..................................................................................3-52
Smart Trunk ......................................................................3-55
Theft-alarm System ............................................3-19
Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-58
Driver Position Memory System........................3-20
Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-61
Storing Positions into Memory ..................................3-20
Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-63
Easy Access Function ....................................................3-21
Gauges ...............................................................................3-63
Steering Wheel .....................................................3-22 Warning and Indicator lights ........................................3-69
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-22
LCD Display Messages ..................................................3-80
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-23
LCD Display (For supervision cluster) ..............3-88
Horn....................................................................................3-23
LCD Display Control........................................................3-88
Mirrors...................................................................3-24 LCD Modes........................................................................3-89
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-24
User Settings Mode........................................................3-93
Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-40
Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-42

F13
Trip Computer .......................................................3-98 Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-145
Conventional Cluster.......................................................3-98 Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-148
Supervision Cluster.......................................................3-102 Climate Control Additional Features...................3-149
Light .....................................................................3-107 Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-149
Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-107 Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation ...............................3-149
Interior Lights ................................................................3-115 Storage Compartment .......................................3-150
Welcome System ...........................................................3-117 Center Console Storage ..............................................3-150
Wipers and Washers..........................................3-119 Sliding Armrest ..............................................................3-150
Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-119 Glove Box........................................................................3-151
Windshield Washers .....................................................3-120 Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-151
Driver Assist System .........................................3-121 Multi box .........................................................................3-152
Rear View Camera ........................................................3-121 Interior Features ................................................3-153
Defroster.............................................................3-122 Cup Holder ......................................................................3-153
Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-122 Sunvisor...........................................................................3-154
Manual Climate Control System.......................3-123 Power Outlet ..................................................................3-154
Heating and Air Conditioning.....................................3-124 USB Charger...................................................................3-156
System Operation .........................................................3-129 Clock.................................................................................3-156
System Maintenance....................................................3-131 Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-157
Automatic Climate Control System..................3-133 Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-157
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-134 Luggage Net Holder .....................................................3-158
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-135
System Operation .........................................................3-141
System Maintenance....................................................3-143

F14
4 Multimedia system 5 Driving your vehicle

Multimedia system .................................................4-2 Before Driving ........................................................5-4


AUX, USB and iPod® port ...............................................4-2 Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2 Before Starting ..................................................................5-4
Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3 Ignition Switch........................................................5-6
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4 Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6
Audio (Display Audio) / Video / Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9
Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-4 Manual Transmission ...........................................5-16
How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5 Manual Transmission Operation..................................5-16
Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7 Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-18
Caring for CDs....................................................................4-8 Automatic Transmission ......................................5-20
Audio (Without Touch Screen) ..........................4-17 Automatic Transmission Operation.............................5-20
Features of Your Audio .................................................4-18 Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-25
Radio Mode.......................................................................4-34 Braking System ....................................................5-27
SiriusXM Radio Mode.....................................................4-37 Power Brakes ...................................................................5-27
Media Mode......................................................................4-39 Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ..........................................5-28
Phone Mode .....................................................................4-45 Rear drum brakes ...........................................................5-28
Voice Recognition Mode ...............................................4-49 Parking Brake...................................................................5-28
Setup Mode ......................................................................4-57 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-30
Declaration of conformity ..................................4-67 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-33
FCC......................................................................................4-67 Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-36
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-37
Good Braking Practices.................................................5-38

F15
Drive Mode Integrated Control System ............5-39 Smart Cruise Control System .............................5-75
Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-41 To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / Cruise Control...................................................................5-76
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-42 To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-77
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-45 Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-77
Limitations of the System.............................................5-48 Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)...............5-49 Distance .............................................................................5-82
System Setting and Activation.....................................5-49 SCC Front Radar Sensor................................................5-84
AEB Warning Message and System Control ............5-51 Limitations of the System.............................................5-86
AEB Front Radar Sensor...............................................5-54 Special Driving Conditions ..................................5-92
System Malfunction .......................................................5-55 Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-92
Limitations of the System.............................................5-56 Rocking the Vehicle ........................................................5-92
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-61 Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-93
LKAS Operation ...............................................................5-62 Driving at Night................................................................5-93
Limitations of the System.............................................5-66 Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-94
LKAS Malfunction ...........................................................5-67 Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-94
LKAS Function Change ..................................................5-68 Highway Driving...............................................................5-95
Cruise Control.......................................................5-70 Winter Driving ......................................................5-96
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-70 Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-96
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-98
Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-100
Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-101
Trailer Towing.....................................................5-105

F16
6 What to do in an emergency If you have a flat tire..........................................6-15
With spare tire .................................................................6-15
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) ........................................6-22
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
Towing ...................................................................6-32
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2
Towing service .................................................................6-32
If the engine stalls while driving ...................................6-2
Removable towing hook ................................................6-33
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-2
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-34
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-3
Tie-down hook ................................................................6-35
If the engine will not start ...................................6-3
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over
slowly....................................................................................6-3
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't
start.......................................................................................6-3
Jump starting ..........................................................6-4
If the engine overheats ........................................6-7
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-9
Check tire pressure...........................................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-10
Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-11
Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position
Indicator.............................................................................6-11
TPMS malfunction indicator.........................................6-12
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-13

F17
7 Maintenance Climate control air filter .....................................7-37
Filter Inspection...............................................................7-37
Engine compartment .............................................7-3 Wiper blades .........................................................7-39
Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-39
Maintenance services ...........................................7-4
Blade Replacement .........................................................7-39
Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-4
Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4 Battery...................................................................7-41
For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-42
Owner maintenance...............................................7-5
Battery Recharging ........................................................7-42
Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-6
Reset features .................................................................7-43
Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-7
Tires and wheels ..................................................7-44
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items..7-24 Tire Care............................................................................7-44
Engine oil ..............................................................7-28 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-45
Checking the Engine Oil Level .....................................7-28 Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-46
Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-29 Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-47
Engine coolant......................................................7-30 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-48
Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-30 Tire Replacement ............................................................7-48
Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-32 Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-49
Brake/clutch fluid................................................7-33 Tire Traction .....................................................................7-49
Checking the Brake/clutch Fluid Level......................7-33 Tire Maintenance ............................................................7-50
Washer fluid .........................................................7-34 Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-50
Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-34 Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-54
Parking brake .......................................................7-33 All Season Tires...............................................................7-57
Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-33 Summer Tires ...................................................................7-57
Air cleaner ............................................................7-35 Snow Tires ........................................................................7-57
Filter Replacement..........................................................7-35

F18
Radial-Ply Tires ...............................................................7-58 Specifications, Consumer information and
8
Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-58
Reporting safety defects
Fuses......................................................................7-60
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-61
Dimensions ..............................................................8-2
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-63
Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-66
Engine ......................................................................8-2
Light bulbs.............................................................7-72 Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3
Headlamp, Parking lamp, Turn signal lamp and Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-5
side marker .......................................................................7-73 Volume and Weight................................................8-6
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-82 Air Conditioning System........................................8-6
Rear combination light bulb replacement .................7-82 Recommended Lubricants and Capacities ..........8-7
High mounted stop light replacement........................7-86 Recommended SAE Viscosity Number .........................8-9
License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-87 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................8-10
Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-88 Vehicle Certification Label .................................8-10
Appearance care ..................................................7-89 Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-11
Exterior Care ....................................................................7-89
Engine Number .....................................................8-11
Interior Care .....................................................................7-95
Refrigerant Label.................................................8-11
Emission control system .....................................7-96
1. Crankcase Emission Control System......................7-96
Consumer Information.........................................8-12
2. Evaporative Emission Control System Including Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-13
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) .......7-96
3. Exhaust Emission Control System..........................7-97
California perchlorate notice ...........................7-100

F19
Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview ..................................................1-2 1


Interior overview....................................................1-4

Your vehicle at a glance


Instrument panel overview ...................................1-5
Engine compartment .............................................1-6
Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood......................................................3-51 5. Tires and wheels ..................................7-44


2. Windows ................................................3-43 6. Headlamp ..............................................7-72
3. Sunroof* ................................................3-47 7. Side repeater lamp* ..............................7-82
4. Wiper blade ..........................................7-39 *: if equipped

OAD015001N

1-2
■ Rear view 1

Your vehicle at a glance


The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Door lock ..............................................3-14 4. Side view mirror ....................................3-40


2. Trunk......................................................3-52 5. Antenna ..................................................4-2
3. Fuel filler door ......................................3-58 6. Rear combination lamp ........................7-82

OAD015002N

1-3
Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-15


2. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-41
3. Central door lock switch ........................3-16
4. Power window switches ........................3-43
5. Power window lock switch......................3-46
6. Fuel filler door release lever ..................3-58
7. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ....................................................3-63
8. Blind spot detection(BSD) system
button*....................................................5-41
9. Lane keeping assist system (LKAS)
button * ..................................................5-61
10. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
OFF button ..........................................5-33
11. Trunk lid release lever ..........................3-53
12. Fuse panel ..........................................7-61
13. Steering wheel ....................................3-22
14. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-23
15. Seat........................................................2-4
16. Hood release lever ..............................3-51
17. Brake pedal..........................................5-27
18. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OAD015003N

1-4
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1

Your vehicle at a glance


1. Light control/Turn signals..................3-107
2. Steering wheel audio controls*/
Bluetooth® wireless technology
hands-free controls* ......................4-3, 4-4
3. Instrument cluster ..............................3-61
4. Horn ....................................................3-23
5. Driver’s front air bag ..........................2-48
6. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-119
7. Cruise control switch* ........................5-70
8. Key ignition switch*/
Engine start/stop button* ..............5-6, 5-9
9. Shift lever ..................................5-16, 5-20
10. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2
11. Climate control system ........3-123, 3-133
12. Seat warmer* ....................................2-19
13. Drive mode integrated control
system ..............................................5-39
14. Passenger’s front air bag..................2-48
15. Glove box........................................3-151
16. Parking brake....................................5-28
* : if equipped

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.


OADA015004

1-5
Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Nu 2.0 MPI

1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-29


2. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-28
3. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir...............7-33
4. Positive battery terminal ...................7-41
5. Negative battery terminal..................7-41
6. Fuse box ...........................................7-63
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-35
8. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-30
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-34

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OAD075100L

1-6
Safety system of your vehicle

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2
Important safety precautions...............................2-2 Child restraint system (CRS) ..............................2-35
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2 Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-35
Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2 Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-36
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2 Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-38
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2 Air bag -
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3 Advanced supplemental restraint system ........2-46
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3 Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-48
Seats ........................................................................2-4 How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-51
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5 What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-56
Front Seats .........................................................................2-6 Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-57
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12 Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-62
Head Restraints ...............................................................2-15 SRS Care............................................................................2-67
Seat warmers ...................................................................2-19 Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-68
Seat belts ..............................................................2-22 Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-69
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-22
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-23
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-25
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-31
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-34
Safety system of your vehicle

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


You will find many safety precautions Restrain All Children Driver Distraction
and recommendations throughout All children under age 13 should ride Driver distraction presents a serious
this section, and throughout this man- in your vehicle properly restrained in and potentially deadly danger, espe-
ual. The safety precautions in this sec- a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
tion are among the most important. and small children should be should be the first concern when
restrained in an appropriate child behind the wheel and drivers need to
Always Wear Your Seat Belt restraint. Larger children should use be aware of the wide array of potential
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder distractions, such as drowsiness,
A seat belt is your best protection in
belt until they can use the seat belt reaching for objects, eating, personal
all types of accidents. Air bags are
properly without a booster seat. grooming, other passengers, and
designed to supplement seat belts,
using cellular phones.
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags, Air Bag Hazards Drivers can become distracted when
ALWAYS make sure you and your they take their eyes and attention off
While air bags can save lives, they the road or their hands off the wheel
passengers wear your seat belts, and can also cause serious or fatal
wear them properly. to focus on activities other than driv-
injuries to occupants who sit too ing. To reduce your risk of distraction
close to them, or who are not prop- or getting into an accident:
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.

2-2
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices Control Your Speed Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga- Excessive speed is a major factor in Condition
tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is crash injuries and deaths. Generally, Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
parked or safely stopped. the higher the speed, the greater the failure can be extremely hazardous. To
• ONLY use your mobile device when risk, but serious injuries can also reduce the possibility of such prob- 2
allowed by laws and when conditions occur at lower speeds. Never drive lems, check your tire pressures and

Safety system of your vehicle


permit safe use. NEVER text or faster than is safe for current condi- condition frequently, and perform all
email while driving. Most states have tions, regardless of the maximum regularly scheduled maintenance.
laws prohibiting drivers from texting. speed posted.
Some states and cities also prohibit
drivers from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving. You
have a responsibility to your passen-
gers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.

2-3
Safety system of your vehicle

SEATS

Front seats
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest

Rear seats
(7) Seat warmer*
(8) Armrest*
(9) Seatback folding
(10)Headrest

* : if equipped

OAD035001N

2-4
Safety Precautions Air bags
WARNING
Adjusting the seats so that you are sit- You can take steps to reduce the risk
ting in a safe, comfortable position of being injured by an inflating air To reduce the risk of serious
plays an important role in driver and bag. Sitting too close to an air bag injury or death from an inflating
passenger safety together with the greatly increases the risk of injury in air bag, take the following pre-
2
seat belts and air bags in an accident. the event the air bag inflates. cautions:

Safety system of your vehicle


The National Highway Traffic Safety • Adjust the driver's seat as far to
WARNING Administration (NHTSA) recommends the rear as possible while main-
that drivers allow at least 10 inches taining the ability to maintain
Do not use a cushion that (25 cm) between the center of the full control of the vehicle.
reduces friction between the seat steering wheel and their chest.
and the passenger. The passen-
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
ger's hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during • Hold the steering wheel by the
an accident or a sudden stop. rim with hands at the 9 o'clock
Serious or fatal internal injuries and 3 o'clock positions to mini-
could result because the seat mize the risk of injuries to your
belt cannot operate properly. hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between the steering wheel
and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.

2-5
Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts Front Seats


WARNING
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip. Take the following precautions WARNING
At all times, passengers should sit when adjusting your seat belt:
upright and be properly restrained. Take the following precautions
• NEVER use one seat belt for when adjusting your seat:
Infants and small children must be more than one occupant.
restrained in appropriate child restraint • NEVER attempt to adjust the
systems. Adults and children who • Always position the seatback seat while the vehicle is mov-
have outgrown a booster seat must be upright with the lap portion of ing. The seat could respond
restrained using the seat belts. the seat belt snug and low with unexpected movement
across the hips. and may cause loss of vehicle
• NEVER allow children or small control resulting in an acci-
infants to ride in a passenger's dent.
lap. • Do not place anything under
• Do not route the seat belt the front seats. Loose objects
across your neck, across sharp in the driver's foot area could
edges, or reroute the shoulder interfere with the operation of
strap away from your body. the foot pedals, causing an
• Do not allow the seat belt to accident.
become caught or jammed. • Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seat-
back.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continued)

2-6
(Continued)
Manual adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
• Use extreme caution when using the levers located on the out-
picking small objects trapped
side of the seat cushion. Before driv-
under the seats or between 2
ing, adjust the seat to the proper
the seat and the center con-
position so that you can easily con-
sole. Your hands might be cut

Safety system of your vehicle


trol the steering wheel, foot pedals
or injured by the sharp edges
and controls on the instrument
of the seat mechanism.
panel.

CAUTION OAD035002

To prevent injury: Forward and rearward adjustment


To move the seat forward or rearward:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt. 1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
Moving the seat cushion for- lever and hold it.
ward may cause strong pres- 2. Slide the seat to the position you
sure on your abdomen. desire.
• Do not allow your hands or 3. Release the lever and make sure
fingers to get caught in the the seat is locked in place. Move
seat mechanisms while the forward and rearward without using
seat is moving. the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.

2-7
Safety system of your vehicle

Reclining seatback Seat belts must be snug against your


Sitting in a reclined position when hips and chest to work properly.
the vehicle is in motion can be dan- When the seatback is reclined, the
gerous. Even when buckled up, the shoulder belt cannot do its job
protection of your restraint system because it will not be snug against
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly your chest. Instead, it will be in front
reduced by reclining your seatback. of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
WARNING The more the seatback is reclined,
NEVER ride with a reclined the greater chance the passenger's
OAD035003
seatback when the vehicle is hips will slide under the lap belt or
Seatback angle moving. the passenger's neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
To recline the seatback: Riding with a reclined seatback
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the increases your chance of seri-
seatback lever. ous or fatal injuries in the event
2. Carefully lean back on the seat of a collision or sudden stop.
and adjust the seatback to the Drivers and passengers should
position you desire. ALWAYS sit well back in their
3. Release the lever and make sure seats, properly belted, and with
the seatback is locked in place. the seatbacks upright.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)

2-8
Power adjustment NOTICE
(for driver's seat, if equipped)
To prevent damage to the seats:
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on • Always stop adjusting the seats
the outside of the seat cushion. Before when the seat has been adjust- 2
driving, adjust the seat to the proper ed as far forward or rearward as
possible.

Safety system of your vehicle


position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and • Do not adjust the seats longer
controls on the instrument panel. than necessary when the engine
is turned off. This may result in
unnecessary battery drain.
OAD035004
WARNING
• Do not operate two or more
Seat cushion height NEVER allow children in the seats at the same time. This may
To change the height of the seat vehicle unattended. The power result in an electrical malfunc-
cushion: seats are operable when the tion.
• Push down on the lever several engine is turned off.
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.

2-9
Safety system of your vehicle

Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
OAD035005 OAD035006 back when the vehicle is moving.
Forward and rearward adjustment Seatback angle Riding with a reclined seatback
To move the seat forward or rearward: To adjust the seatback: increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
1. Push the control switch forward or 1. Rotate the top of control switch collision or sudden stop.
rearward. forward or rearward.
Driver and passengers should
2. Release the switch once the seat 2. Release the switch once the seat- ALWAYS sit well back in their
reaches the desired position. back reaches the desired position. seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

2-10
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against 2
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could

Safety system of your vehicle


be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or OAD035007 OAD035008
the passenger's neck will strike the Seat cushion height Lumbar support (if equipped)
shoulder belt.
To change the height of the seat To adjust the lumbar support:
cushion: 1. Press the front portion of the
1. Pull up the front portion of the con- switch (1) to increase support or
trol switch up to raise or push down the rear portion of the switch (2) to
to lower the front part of the seat decrease support.
cushion. Pull up the rear portion of 2. Release the switch once it reach-
the control switch to raise or push es the desired position.
down to lower the whole of the seat
cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.

2-11
Safety system of your vehicle

Seatback pocket (if equipped) Rear Seats


CAUTION
Folding the rear seat
Do not put heavy or sharp The rear seatbacks can be folded to
objects in the seatback pockets. facilitate carrying long items or to
In an accident they could come increase the luggage capacity of the
loose from the pocket and vehicle.
injure occupants.
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
OAD035017
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
The seatback pocket is provided on seating position and no seat
the back of the front seatbacks. belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
WARNING injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
To prevent the Occupant • Objects carried on the folded
Classification System from mal- down seatback should not
functioning: extend higher than the top of
Do not hang onto the front pas- the front seatbacks. This
senger's seatback. could allow cargo to slide for-
ward and cause injury or dam-
age during sudden stops.

2-12
2

Safety system of your vehicle


OAD035019 OAD035021 OAD035022
To fold down the rear seatback: 3. Pull on the seatback folding lever 4. Fold the seatback toward the front
1. Set the front seatback to the (1) located in the trunk. of the vehicle.
upright position and if necessary, 5. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold
slide the front seat forward. the seatback to the upright posi-
2. Lower the rear head restraints to tion. Push the seatback firmly until
the lowest position by pushing and it clicks into place. Make sure the
holding the release button (1) and seatback is locked in place.
pushing down on the headrest (2). When you return the seatback to
. its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by push-
ing on the top of the seatback.

2-13
Safety system of your vehicle

Armrest (if equipped)


WARNING WARNING
When returning the rear seat- Make sure the engine is off, the
back from a folded to an upright shift lever is in P (Park), and the
position, hold the seatback and parking brake is securely applied
return it slowly. Ensure that the whenever loading or unloading
seatback is completely locked cargo. Failure to take these steps
into its upright position by may allow the vehicle to move if
pushing on the top of the seat- the shift lever is inadvertently
back. In an accident or sudden moved to another position.
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter OAD035023
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious The armrest is located in the center
injury or death. of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down by using the strap from the
seatback to use it.
WARNING If your car is not equipped with a rear
armrest, the rear cup holders are
Do not place objects in the rear located at the back of the center con-
seats, since they cannot be sole.
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

2-14
Head Restraints (Continued)
CAUTION
The vehicle's front and rear seats •
• Be careful when loading have adjustable head restraints. The
cargo through the rear pas- head restraints provide comfort for
senger seats to prevent dam- passengers, but more importantly 2
age to the vehicle interior. they are designed to help protect

Safety system of your vehicle


passengers from whiplash and other
• When cargo is loaded through neck and spinal injuries during an
the rear passenger seats, accident, especially in a rear impact
ensure the cargo is properly collision.
secured to prevent it from OLF034072N
moving while driving.
• Unsecured cargo in the pas- WARNING Adjust the head restraints so
senger compartment can the middle of the head
To reduce the risk of serious restraints is at the same height
cause damage to the vehicle injury or death in an accident,
or injury to it's occupants. as the height of the top of the
take the following precautions eyes.
when adjusting your head
restraints:
• NEVER adjust the head
restraint position of the dri-
• Always properly adjust the ver’s seat when the vehicle is
head restraints for all passen- in motion.
gers BEFORE starting the
vehicle.
• Adjust the head restraint as
close to the passenger’s head
• NEVER let anyone ride in a as possible. Do not use a seat
seat with the head restraints cushion that holds the body
removed. away from the seatback.
(Continued) • Make sure the head restraint
locks into position after adjust-
ing it.

2-15
Safety system of your vehicle

NOTICE Front seat head restraints


To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the head restraints.

OAD035010

ODH033105L Adjusting the height up and down


The vehicle's front and passenger's To raise the head restraint:
seats are equipped with adjustable 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
head restraints for the passengers
safety and comfort. To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).

2-16
■ Type A 3. Press the head restraint release
button (3) while pulling the head
restraint up (4).

Safety system of your vehicle


OAD035011
■ Type B
OLF034015

NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
OAD035012
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as it
can go.

2-17
Safety system of your vehicle

■ Type A Rear seat head restraints

OAD035013
■ Type B
OAD035018

ODH034111 Adjusting the height up and down


The rear seats are equipped with To raise the head restraint:
head restraints in all the seating 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
positions for the passenger's safety
and comfort. To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
OAD035014 2. Lower the head restraint to the
To reinstall the head restraint: desired position (3).
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into
the holes while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3. Recline the seatback (4) forward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (3).
2-18
Seat warmers
WARNING
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm The seat warmers can cause a
the seats during cold weather. SERIOUS BURN, even at low 2
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.

Safety system of your vehicle


Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
OAD035018N perature change or pain to the
Removal/Reinstallation skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
To remove the head restraint: types of passengers:
1. Raise the head restraint as far as • Infants, children, elderly or
it can go. disabled persons, or hospital
2. Press the head restraint release outpatients.
button (1) while pulling the head • People with sensitive skin or
restraint up (2). who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
To reinstall the head restraint: • Intoxicated individuals.
1. Put the head restraint poles into • People taking medication that
the holes (3) while pressing the can cause drowsiness or
release button (1). sleepiness.
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.

2-19
Safety system of your vehicle

During mild weather or under condi-


WARNING tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
NEVER place anything on the switches in the OFF position.
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in oper-
ation, such as a blanket or seat • Each time you push the switch, the
cushion. This may cause the temperature setting of the seat is
seat warmer to overheat, caus- changed as follows :
ing a burn or damage to the seat.
OFF → HIGH ( )



NOTICE OAD035061L LOW ( )

MIDDLE ( )
To prevent damage to the seat While the engine is running, push
warmers and seats: either of the switches to warm the dri- • When pressing the switch for more
• Never use a solvent such as ver's seat or front passenger's seat. than 1.5 seconds with the seat
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol warmer operating, the seat warmer
or gasoline to clean the seats. will turn OFF.
• Do not place heavy or sharp • The seat warmer defaults to the
objects on seats equipped with OFF position whenever the ignition
seat warmers. switch is in the ON position.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer. i Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.

2-20
Rear seat warmers (if equipped) Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( ) 2

Safety system of your vehicle


The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.

i Information
OAD035024 With the seat warmer switch in the
While the engine is running, push ON position, the heating system in the
either of the switches to warm the rear seat turns off or on automatically
seat. depending on the seat temperature.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.

2-21
Safety system of your vehicle

SEAT BELTS
This section describes how to use the
(Continued) (Continued)
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when • NEVER allow children to ride • Do not use a seat belt if the
using seat belts. in the front passenger seat. If webbing or hardware is dam-
a child age 13 or older must be aged.
seated in the front seat, move • Do not latch the seat belt into
Seat Belt Safety Precautions the seat as far back as possi- the buckles of other seats.
Always fasten your seat belt and ble and properly restrain them
in the seat. • NEVER unfasten the seat belt
make sure all passengers have fas- while driving. This may cause
tened their seat belts before starting • NEVER allow an infant or child loss of vehicle control result-
any trip. Air bags are designed to to be carried on an occupant’s ing in an accident.
supplement the seat belt as an addi- lap.
tional safety device, but they are not a • Make sure there is nothing in
• NEVER ride with the seatback the buckle interfering with the
substitute. Most states require all reclined when the vehicle is
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat seat belt latch mechanism.
moving. This may prevent the seat belt
belts.
• Do not allow children to share from fastening securely.
a seat or seat belt. • No modifications or additions
WARNING • Do not wear the shoulder belt should be made by the user
Seat belts must be used by ALL under your arm or behind your which will either prevent the
passengers whenever the vehi- back. seat belt adjusting devices
cle is moving. Take the following • Always wear both the shoul- from operating to remove
precautions when adjusting and der portion and lap portion of slack, or prevent the seat belt
wearing seat belts: the lap/shoulder belt. assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• ALWAYS properly restrain • Do not use the seat belt if it is
children under age 13 in the twisted. A twisted seat belt
rear seats. will not protect you properly
(Continued) in an accident.
(Continued)

2-22
Seat Belt Warning Light If you continue not to fasten the seat
WARNING belt and you drive over 6mph
Seat belt warning light (9km/h), the warning light will stay
Damaged seat belts and seat (for driver’s seat) illuminated.
belt assemblies will not operate 2
properly. Always replace: If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 12mph
• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-

Safety system of your vehicle


(20km/h) the seat belt warning chime
aged webbing will sound for approximately 100 sec-
• Damaged hardware onds and the corresponding warning
• The entire seat belt assembly light will blink.
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to If you unfasten the seat belt while
webbing or assembly is not driving under 12mph (20km/h), the
apparent seat belt warning light will illuminate
OLMB033022 until the seat belt is fastened.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
As a reminder to the driver, the seat driving over 12mph (20km/h), the
belt warning light will illuminate and seat belt warning chime will sound for
warning chime will sound for approxi- approximately 100 seconds and the
mately 6 seconds each time you turn corresponding warning light will blink.
the ignition switch ON if the seat belt
is unfastened.

2-23
Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belt warning light If you continue not to fasten the seat
(for front passenger's seat) belt and you drive over 6mph WARNING
(9km/h), the warning light will stay
■ Type A
illuminated. The front passenger's seat belt
warning light may not properly
If you continue not to fasten the seat operate if the front passenger
belt and you drive over 12mph does not sit properly in the seat.
(20km/h) the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving under 12mph (20km/h) the
OAD035025L seat belt warning light will illuminate
■ Type B
until the seat belt is fastened.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving over 12mph (20km/h), the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the
corresponding warning light will blink.

OAD035026L

As a reminder to the front passenger,


the front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing lights will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds each time you turn
the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
2-24
Seat Belt Restraint System If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys- also lock if you try to lean forward too
tem with emergency locking quickly.
retractor 2
NOTICE

Safety system of your vehicle


If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
OAD035027
belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
three different positions for maximum
OLMB033087
comfort and safety.
To fasten your seat belt: The shoulder portion should be
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor adjusted so it lies across your chest
and insert the metal tab (1) into the and midway over your shoulder near-
buckle (2). There will be an audible est the door, not over your neck.
"click" when the tab locks into the To adjust the height of the seat belt
buckle. anchor, lower or raise the height
The seat belt automatically adjusts to adjuster into an appropriate position.
the proper length after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and move with you.

2-25
Safety system of your vehicle

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up


(Continued)
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2). • Position one arm under the
Release the button to lock the anchor shoulder belt and the other over
into position. Try sliding the height the belt, as shown in the illus-
adjuster to make sure that it has tration.
locked into position. • Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
OLMB033025 belt across your neck or face.

WARNING
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the fol-
lowing precautions when adjust-
ing the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)

2-26
Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3- When the seat belt is fully extended
point system with convertible from the retractor to allow the installa-
locking retractor tion of a child restraint system, the
This type of seat belt combines the seat belt operation changes to allow
features of both an emergency locking the belt to retract, but not to extend 2
retractor seat belt and an automatic (Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint

Safety system of your vehicle


locking retractor seat belt. Convertible
retractor type seat belts are installed in System" section in this chapter.
the rear seat positions to help accom-
modate the installation of child NOTICE
restraint systems. Although a convert- Although the seat belt retractor
ible retractor is also installed in the provides the same level of protec-
ODH033057
front passenger seat position, NEVER tion for seated passengers in To release your seat belt:
place any infant/child restraint system either emergency or automatic Press the release button (1) in the
in the front seat of the vehicle. locking modes, the emergency locking buckle.
locking mode allows seated pas- When it is released, the belt should
To fasten your seat belt: sengers to move freely in their automatically draw back into the
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor seat while keeping some tension retractor. If this does not happen,
and insert the metal tab into the buck- on the belt. During a collision or check the belt to be sure it is not twist-
le. There will be an audible "click" sudden stop, the retractor auto- ed, then try again.
when the tab locks into the buckle. matically locks the belt to help
When not securing a child restraint, restrain your body.
the seat belt operates in the same way To deactivate the automatic lock-
as the driver's seat belt (Emergency ing mode, unbuckle the seat belt
Locking Retractor Type). It automati- and allow the belt to fully retract.
cally adjusts to the proper length only
after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly across your hips.

2-27
Safety system of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt When the vehicle stops suddenly, or


(Driver and front passenger) if the occupant tries to lean forward WARNING
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal • Always wear your seat belt and
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti- sit properly in your seat.
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter • Do not use the seat belt if it is
contact against the occupant's body. loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
(1) Retractor Pretensioner tect you properly in an acci-
The purpose of the retractor pre- dent.
tensioner is to make sure that the • Do not place anything near the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against buckle. This may adversely
the occupant's upper body in cer- affect the buckle and cause it
tain frontal collisions. to function improperly.
OTL035053 (2) Emergency Fastening Device • Always replace your pre-ten-
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's System sioners after activation or an
and front passenger's Pre-tensioner The purpose of the Emergency accident.
Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner Fastening Device System is to
and Emergency Fastening Device
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
make sure that the pelvis belts fit or replace the pre-tensioners
System). The purpose of the pre-ten- in tightly against the occupant's yourself. This must be done by
sioner is to make sure the seat belts lower body in certain frontal colli- an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
fit tightly against the occupant's body sions.
in certain frontal collisions. The • Do not hit the seat belt assem-
Emergency Fastening Device If the system senses excessive ten- blies.
System may be activated in certain sion on the driver or passenger's
crashes where the frontal collision is seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
severe enough, together with the air tem activates, the load limiter inside
bags. the retractor pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.

2-28
NOTICE
WARNING
The sensor that activates the SRS
Do not touch the pre-tensioner air bag is connected with the
seat belt assemblies for several pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS 2
minutes after they have been air bag warning light on the instru-
activated. When the pre-ten- ment panel will illuminate for

Safety system of your vehicle


sioner seat belt mechanism approximately 6 seconds after the
deploys during a collision, the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
pre-tensioners become hot and tion, and then it should turn off.
can burn you. If the pre-tensioner is not working
OLMB033040/Q properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS air bag is
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System not malfunctioning. If the warning
consists mainly of the following com- light does not illuminate, stays
ponents. Their locations are shown in illuminated or illuminates when
the illustration above: the vehicle is being driven, have
1. SRS air bag warning light an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
2. Retractor pre-tensioner inspect the pre-tensioner seat
3. SRS control module belts and SRS air bags as soon as
possible.
4. Emergency Fastening Device
System

2-29
Safety system of your vehicle

NOTICE Rear center seat belt


WARNING
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's pre-tensioner seat • Fasten your seat belt while
belts may be activated in certain sitting properly in an upright
frontal or side collisions or position to maximize the
rollovers. effectiveness of the pre-ten-
• The pre-tensioners will not be sioner seat belt system.
activated if the seat belts are not • A pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
worn at the time of the collision. tem is designed to activate
• When the pre-tensioner seat only once. Replace the pre-
belts are activated, a loud noise tensioner seat belt system, if it
may be heard and fine dust, was activated in an accident.
OAD035028
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger When using the rear center seat belt,
compartment. These are normal the buckle with the "CENTER" mark
operating conditions and are not must be used.
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.

2-30
Additional Seat Belt Safety Seat belt use and children
Precautions WARNING
Infant and small children
Seat belt use during pregnancy • A pregnant woman or a All 50 states have child restraint laws
patient is more vulnerable to which require children to travel in
The seat belt should always be used
any imapcts on the abdomen approved child restraint devices, 2
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect during an abrupt stop or acci- including booster seats. The age at

Safety system of your vehicle


yourself by always wearing the seat dent. If you are in an accident which seat belts can be used instead
belt. while pregnant, we recom- of child restraints differs among
mend you consult your doc- states, so you should be aware of the
Pregnant women should always wear specific requirements in your state,
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the tor.
• To reduce the risk of serious and where you are travelling. Infant
shoulder belt across your chest, rout- and child restraints must be properly
ed between your breasts and away injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, placed and installed in a rear seat.
from your neck. Place the lap belt line For more information refer to the
so that it fits snugly and as low as pos- pregnant women should
NEVER place the lap portion "Child Restraint Systems" section in
sible across the hips, not across the this chapter.
abdomen. of the seat belt above or over
the area of the abdomen
where the unborn child is
located.

2-31
Safety system of your vehicle

Small children are best protected Larger children


WARNING from injury in an accident when prop- Children under age 13 and who are
erly restrained in the rear seat by a too large for a booster seat must
ALWAYS properly restrain infants child restraint system that meets the
and small children in a child always occupy the rear seat and use
requirements of the Federal Motor the available lap/shoulder belts. A
restraint appropriate for the Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
child’s height and weight. seat belt should lie across the upper
buying any child restraint system, thighs and be snug across the shoul-
To reduce the risk of serious make sure that it has a label certify- der and chest to restrain the child
injury or death to a child and ing that it meets Federal Motor safely. Check belt fit periodically.
other passengers, NEVER hold a Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 213. Children are afforded the most safe-
child in your lap or arms when The restraint must be appropriate for ty in the event of an accident when
the vehicle is moving.The violent your child’s height and weight. Check they are restrained by a proper
forces created during an acci- the label on the child restraint for this restraint system and/or seat belts in
dent will tear the child from your information. Refer to the "Child the rear seat. Always have the
arms and throw the child against Restraint Systems" section in this LATCH system inspected by your
the interior of the vehicle. chapter. authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.

2-32
If the shoulder belt portion slightly Transporting an injured person A seat belt cannot provide proper
touches the child's neck or face, try A seat belt should be used when an protection if the person is lying down
placing the child closer to the center injured person is being transported. in the rear seat or if the front or rear
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still Consult a physician for specific rec- seats are in a reclined position.
touches their face or neck they need ommendations. 2
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat. WARNING

Safety system of your vehicle


One person per belt
• NEVER ride with a reclined
WARNING Two people (including children) should seatback when the vehicle is
never attempt to use a single seat belt. moving.
This could increase the severity of
• Always make sure children injuries in case of an accident. • Riding with a reclined seatback
are wearing their seat belts increases your chance of seri-
and that they are properly ous or fatal injuries in the event
adjusted before driving. Do not lie down of a collision or sudden stop.
• NEVER allow the shoulder Sitting in a reclined position when the • Drivers and passengers should
belt to contact the child’s vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. always sit well back in their
neck or face. Even when buckled up, the protec- seats, properly belted, and with
• Do not allow more than one tions of your restraint system (seat the seatbacks upright.
child to use a single seat belt. belts and air bags) is greatly reduced
by reclining your seatback.
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving.

2-33
Safety system of your vehicle

Care of Seat Belts When to replace seat belts


Seat belt systems should never be The entire seat belt assembly or
disassembled or modified. In addi- assemblies should be replaced if the
tion, care should be taken to assure vehicle has been involved in an acci-
that seat belts and belt hardware are dent. This should be done even if no
not damaged by seat hinges, doors damage is visible. Additional ques-
or other abuse. tions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry


Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.

2-34
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Children Always in the Rear Children under age 13 must always Child restraint systems must be
ride in the rear seats and must properly placed and installed in the
WARNING always be properly restrained to min- rear seat. You must use a commer-
imize the risk of injury in an accident, cially available child restraint system
Always properly restrain chil- sudden stop or sudden maneuver. that meets the requirements of the 2
dren in the rear seats of the According to accident statistics, chil- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
dren are safer when properly Standards (FMVSS 213).

Safety system of your vehicle


vehicle.
restrained in the rear seats than in Child restraint systems are generally
Children of all ages are safer the front seat. Even with air bags,
when restrained in the rear seat. designed to be secured in a vehicle
children can be seriously injured seat by lap belt portion of a
A child riding in the front pas- or killed. Children too large for a
senger seat can be forcefully lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
child restraint must use the seat belts tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.
struck by an inflating air bag provided.
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH. All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices. The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the spe-
cific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.

2-35
Safety system of your vehicle

Child restraint system (CRS) (Continued) Selecting a Child Restraint


Infants and younger children must be System (CRS)
restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur- When selecting a CRS for your child,
ing or forward-facing CRS that has always:
er's instructions for installa-
first been properly secured to the
tion and use. • Make sure the CRS has a label
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
• Always properly restrain your certifying that it meets applicable
comply with the instructions for
child in the child restraint. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
installation and use provided by the
Standards (FMVSS 213).
manufacturer of the child restraint. • If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of • Select a child restraint based on
a child seat (as described in your child’s height and weight. The
WARNING required label or the instructions
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of for use typically provide this infor-
An improperly secured child mation.
restraint can increase the risk the respective seating posi-
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH tion shall be readjusted or • Select a child restraint that fits the
in an accident. Always take the entirely removed. vehicle seating position where it
following precautions when • Do not use an infant carrier or will be used.
using a child restraint system: a child safety seat that • Read and comply with the warn-
• NEVER install a child or infant "hooks" over a seatback, it ings and instructions for installation
restraint in the front passen- may not provide adequate and use provided with the child
ger's seat. protection in an accident. restraint system.
• Always properly secure the • After an accident, have a
child restraint to a rear seat of HYUNDAI dealer check the
the vehicle. child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
(Continued) lower anchors.

2-36
Child restraint system types Continue to use a rear-facing child
There are three main types of child seat for as long as your child will fit
restraint systems: rear-facing seats, within the height and weight limits
forward-facing seats, and booster allowed by the child seat manufactur-
seats. They are classified according er. It's the best way to keep them 2
to the child’s age, height and weight. safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your

Safety system of your vehicle


child is ready for a forward-facing
Rear-facing child seats child restraint with a harness.

WARNING
OLMB033041
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen- A rear-facing child seat provides
ger’s seat. restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The har-
Placing a rear-facing child ness system holds the child in place,
restraint in the front seat can and in an accident, acts to keep the
result in SERIOUS INJURY or child positioned in the seat and
DEATH if the child restraint is reduce the stress to the neck and
struck by an inflating air bag. spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant child
restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ-
ically have higher height and weight
limits for the rear-facing position,
allowing you to keep your child rear-
facing for a longer period of time.

2-37
Safety system of your vehicle

Booster seats Installing a Child Restraint


A booster seat is a restraint designed System (CRS)
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions WARNING
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child. Before installing your child
Keep your child in a booster seat until restraint system always:
they are big enough to sit in the seat • Read and follow the instruc-
without a booster and still have the tions provided by the manu-
seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to facturer of the child restraint.
fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug- • Read and follow the instruc-
OAD035029 ly across the upper thighs, not the tions regarding child restraint
Forward-facing child restraints stomach. The shoulder belt should lie systems in this manual.
A forward-facing child seat provides snug across the shoulder and chest
and not across the neck or face. Failure to follow all warnings
restraint for the child's body with a and instructions could increase
harness. Keep children in a forward- Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
facing child seat with a harness until or DEATH if an accident occurs.
they reach the top height or weight be properly restrained to minimize the
limit allowed by your child restraint’s risk of injury.
manufacturer.
WARNING
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing child restraint, your child is If the vehicle headrest prevents
ready for a booster seat. proper installation of a child
seat (as described in the child
seat system manual, the head-
rest of the respective seating
position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.

2-38
After selecting a proper child seat for Lower Anchors and Tether for
your child, check to make sure it fits CAUTION Children (LATCH System)
properly in your vehicle. Follow the The LATCH system holds a child
instructions provided by the manu- A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. To restraint during driving and in an acci-
facturer when installing the child
prevent burns, check the seat- dent. This system is designed to 2
seat. Note these general steps when make installation of the child restraint
installing the seat to your vehicle: ing surface and buckles before

Safety system of your vehicle


placing your child in the child easier and reduce the possibility of
• Properly secure the child restraint restraint. improperly installing your child
to the vehicle. All child restraints restraint. The LATCH system uses
must be secured to the vehicle with anchors in the vehicle and attach-
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or ments on the child restraint. The
with the LATCH system. LATCH system eliminates the need
• Make sure the child restraint is to use seat belts to secure the child
firmly secured. After installing a restraint to the rear seats.
child restraint to the vehicle, push Lower anchors are metal bars built
and pull the seat forward-and-back into the vehicle. There are two lower
and side-to-side to verify that it is anchors for each LATCH seating
securely attached to the seat. A position that will accommodate a
child restraint secured with a seat child restraint with lower attachments.
belt should be installed as firmly as To use the LATCH system in your
possible. However, some side-to- vehicle, you must have a child
side movement can be expected. restraint with LATCH attachments.
• Secure the child in the child The child seat manufacturer will pro-
restraint. Make sure the child is vide you with instructions on how to
properly strapped in the child use the child seat with its attachments
restraint according to the manufac- for the LATCH lower anchors.
turer instructions.

2-39
Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING
Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH Lower Anchor
anchors in the rear center seat- Position Indicator
ing position.There are no LATCH
anchors provided for this seat.
Using the outboard seat anchors
can damage the anchors which
may break or fail in a collision
Lower Anchor
resulting in serious injury or
ODH033067 OAD035032
death.
LATCH anchors have been provided The lower anchor position indicator
in the left and right outboard rear symbols are located on the left and
seating positions. Their locations are right rear seat backs to identify the
shown in the illustration. There are no position of the lower anchors in your
LATCH anchors provided for the cen- vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
ter rear seating position. The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.

2-40
Securing a child restraint with NOTICE
the LATCH anchors system WARNING
The recommended weight for the
To install a LATCH-compatible child Take the following precautions LATCH system is under 65 lb (30
restraint in either of the rear outboard when using the LATCH system: kg).
seating positions: 2
• Read and follow all installation How to determine an appropriate
1. Move the seat belt buckle away from instructions provided with child restraint weight:

Safety system of your vehicle


the lower anchors. your child restraint system. Child weight + Child restraint
2. Move any other objects away from • To prevent the child from weight < 65 lb (30kg)
the anchors that could prevent a reaching and taking hold of
secure connection between the child unretracted seat belts, buckle
restraint and the lower anchors. all unused rear seat belts and
3. Place the child restraint on the vehi- retract the seat belt webbing
cle seat, then attach the seat to the behind the child. Children can
lower anchors according to the be strangled if a shoulder belt
instructions provided by the child becomes wrapped around
restraint manufacturer. their neck and the seat belt
4. Follow the child restraint instructions tightens.
for properly adjusting and tightening • NEVER attach more than one
the lower attachments on the child child restraint to a single
restraint to the lower anchors. anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH sys-
tem inspected by your author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.

2-41
Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat


with "Tether Anchor" system WARNING
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to OLF034035
come loose or break. To install the tether anchor:
• Do not attach the tether strap 1. Route the child restraint tether strap
OLF034034
to anything other than the cor- over the child restraint seatback.
First secure the child restraint with rect tether anchor. It may not
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat Route the tether strap under the
work properly if attached to head restraint and between the
belt. If the child restraint manufactur- something else.
er recommends that the top tether head restraint posts, or route the
• Do not use the tether anchors tether strap over the top of the vehi-
strap be attached, attach and tighten for adult seat belts or harness-
the top tether strap to the top tether cle seatback. Make sure the strap is
es, or for attaching other items not twisted.
strap anchor. or equipment to the vehicle.
Child restraint hook holders are 2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
located on the package tray. tether anchor, then tighten the teth-
er strap according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to firmly
secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat for-
ward-and-back and side-to-side.
2-42
Securing a child restraint with To install a child restraint system on
lap/shoulder belt the rear seats, do the following:
When not using the LATCH system, 1. Place the child restraint system on
all child restraints must be secured to a rear seat and route the lap/
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part shoulder belt around or through 2
of a lap/shoulder belt. the child restraint, following the

Safety system of your vehicle


restraint manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
ALWAYS place a rear-facing not twisted.
child restraint in the rear seat of
OLMB033044
the vehicle. NOTICE
Placing a rear-facing child Automatic locking mode
When using the rear center seat
restraint in the front seat can Since all passenger seat belts move belt, you should also refer to the
result in serious injury or death freely under normal conditions and "Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-
if the child restraint is struck by only lock under extreme or emer- point system" section in this
an inflating air bag. gency conditions (emergency locking chapter.
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the "Automatic Locking"
mode to secure a child restraint.
The "Automatic Locking" mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from caus-
ing the seat belt to loosen and com-
promise the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.

2-43
Safety system of your vehicle

OLMB033045 OLMB033097 OLMB033098


2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch 3. Pull the shoulder portion of the 4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
into the buckle. Listen for the dis- seat belt all the way out. When the of the seat belt to retract and listen
tinct "click" sound. shoulder portion of the seat belt is for an audible "clicking" or "ratch-
fully extended, it will shift the eting" sound. This indicates that
i Information retractor to the "Automatic the retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode. Locking" mode. If no distinct
Position the release button so that it is sound is heard, repeat steps 3
easy to access in case of an emergency. and 4.

2-44
5. Remove as much slack from the NOTICE To remove the child restraint, press
belt as possible by pushing down the release button on the buckle and
on the child restraint system while When the seat belt is allowed to then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
feeding the shoulder belt back into retract to its fully stowed position, the restraint and allow the seat belt
the retractor. the retractor will automatically to retract fully. 2
6. Push and pull on the child restraint switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency

Safety system of your vehicle


system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it lock mode for normal adult usage.
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6. WARNING
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode If the retractor is not in the
by attempting to pull more of the "Automatic Locking" mode, the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you child restraint can move when
cannot, the retractor is in the your vehicle turns or stops sud-
"Automatic Locking" mode. denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
in the car, including manually
recommends you to use a tether
pulling the seat belt all the way
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
out to shift the rectractor to the
refer to the previous pages for more
"Automatic Locking" mode.
information.

2-45
Safety system of your vehicle

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1. Driver's front air bag


2. Passenger's front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Driver's knee air bag

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OAD035033

2-46
This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag WARNING
System for the driver's seat and front
passenger's seats. AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The front air bags are designed to ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, 2
supplement the three-point seat everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in

Safety system of your vehicle


belts. For these air bags to provide a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
protection, the seat belts must be when the air bag inflates.
worn at all times when driving. NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
You can be severely injured or killed passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
in an accident if you are not wearing or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
supplement seat belts, but do not safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
replace them. Also, air bags are not must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
designed to deploy in every collision. and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-
the only restraint protecting you.
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at
least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.

2-47
Safety system of your vehicle

Where Are the Air Bags? ■ Driver's front air bag The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passen-
Driver's and passenger's front gers with additional protection than
air bags that offered by the seat belt system
Your vehicle is equipped with a alone. The SRS uses sensors to
Advanced Supplemental Restraint gather information about the driver’s
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts and front passenger's seat belt
at both the driver and passenger usage and impact severity.
seating positions. The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
The SRS consists of air bags which OAD035034 mine if the driver and front passen-
are located in the center of the steer- ■ Driver's knee air bag ger's seat belts are fastened. These
ing wheel, in the driver's side lower sensors provide the ability to control
crash pad below the steering wheel the SRS deployment based on
column and the passenger's side whether or not the seat belts are fas-
front panel pad above the glove box. tened, and how severe the impact is.
The air bags are labeled with the let- The advanced SRS offers the ability
ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the to control the air bag inflation within
pad covers. two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
OAD035035 A second stage level is provided for
■ Passenger's front air bag more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, and
seat belt usage, the SRS Control
Module (SRSCM) controls the air
bag inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.

OAD035039

2-48
Side air bags The side air bags are designed to
WARNING ]

deploy only during certain side impact


collisions, depending on the crash
To reduce the risk of serious severity, angle, speed and point of
injury or death from an inflating impact. 2
front air bags, take the following
precautions: The side and curtain air bags on

Safety system of your vehicle


both sides of the vehicle may deploy
• Seat belts must be worn at all if a rollover or possible rollover is
times to help keep occupants detected.
positioned properly.
The side air bags are not designed to
• Move your seat as far back as deploy in all side impact or rollover
possible from front air bags, situations.
OAD035040
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
OAD035041
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the Your vehicle is equipped with a side
glove box. Such objects could air bag in each front seat. The pur-
cause harm if the vehicle is in a pose of the air bag is to provide the
crash severe enough to cause vehicle's driver and the front passen-
the air bags to deploy. ger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.

2-49
Safety system of your vehicle

(Continued)
Curtain air bags
WARNING
• Do not place any objects
To reduce the risk of serious between the door and the
injury or death from an inflating seat. They may become dan-
side air bag, take the following gerous projectiles if the side
precautions: air bag inflates.
• Seat belts must be worn at all • Do not install any accessories
times to help keep occupants on the side or near the side air
positioned properly. bags.
• Do not allow passengers to • Do not cause impact to the
lean their heads or bodies onto doors when the ignition OAD035042
doors, put their arms on the switch is in the ON position or
doors, stretch their arms out of this may cause the side air
the window, or place objects bags to inflate.
between the doors and seats. • If the seat or seat cover is
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9 damaged, have the vehicle
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions, checked and repaired by an
to minimize the risk of injuries authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers. This could reduce
OAD035043
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system. Curtain air bags are located along
• Do not place any objects over both sides of the roof rails above the
the air bag or between the air front and rear doors.
bag and yourself.
(Continued)

2-50
They are designed to help protect the How Does the Air Bag System
heads of the front seat occupants WARNING Operate?
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating 2
The curtain air bags are designed to curtain air bags, take the follow-
deploy only during certain side ing precautions:

Safety system of your vehicle


impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and • All seat occupants must wear
impact. seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
The side and curtain air bags on properly.
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is • Properly secure child restraints
detected. as far away from the door as
possible.
The curtain air bags are not designed OAD035074N
to deploy in all side impact or rollover • Do not allow passengers to
situations. lean their heads or bodies The SRS consists of the following
onto doors, put their arms on components:
the doors, stretch their arms 1. Driver's front air bag module
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors 2. Passenger's front air bag module
and seats. 3. Side air bag modules
• Do not open or repair the side 4. Curtain air bag modules
curtain air bags. 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors

2-51
Safety system of your vehicle

10. Side pressure sensors SRS warning light


11. Driver's knee air bag module
WARNING
12. Emergency Fastening Device If your SRS malfunctions, the air
System bag may not inflate properly dur-
13. Occupant classification system ing an accident increasing the
risk of serious injury or death.
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
The SRSCM (Supplemental System) air bag warning light on the If any of the following condi-
Restraint System Control Module) instrument panel displays the air bag tions occur, your SRS is mal-
continually monitors all SRS compo- symbol depicted in the illustration. functioning:
nents while the Engine Start/Stop The system checks the air bag elec- • The light does not turn on for
button is in the ON position to deter- trical system for malfunctions. The approximately six seconds
mine if a crash impact is severe light indicates that there is a potential when the ignition switch is in
enough to require air bag deploy- malfunction with your air bag system, the ON position.
ment or pre-tensioner seat belt which could include your side and • The light stays on after illumi-
deployment. curtain air bags used for rollover pro- nating for approximately six
tection. seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these con-
ditions occur.

2-52
During a frontal collision, sensors will • Air bag deployment depends on a • To help provide protection, the air
detect the vehicle's deceleration. If number of factors including vehicle bags must inflate rapidly. The speed
the rate of deceleration is high speed, angles of impact and the of air bag inflation is a consequence
enough, the control unit will inflate density and stiffness of the vehicles of extremely short time in which to
the front air bags. or objects which your vehicle inflate the air bag between the 2
The front air bags help protect the impacts during a collision. The occupant and the vehicle structures
determining factors are not limited before the occupant impacts those

Safety system of your vehicle


driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in to those mentioned above. structures. This speed of inflation
which seat belts alone cannot pro- • The front air bags will completely reduces the risk of serious or life-
vide adequate restraint. When need- inflate and deflate in an instant. It is threatening injuries and is thus a
ed, the side air bags help provide virtually impossible for you to see necessary part of air bag design.
protection in the event of a side the air bags inflate during an acci- However, the rapid air bag inflation
impact or rollover. dent. It is much more likely that you can also cause injuries which can
• Air bags are activated (able to will simply see the deflated air bags include facial abrasions, bruises
inflate if necessary) only when the hanging out of their storage com- and broken bones because the
ignition switch is in the ON position. partments after the collision. inflation speed also causes the air
• In addition to inflating in certain bags to expand with a great deal of
• Air bags inflate in the event of cer- force.
tain frontal or side collisions to help side collisions, vehicles equipped
protect the occupants from serious with a rollover sensor, side and • There are even circumstances
physical injury. curtain air bags will inflate if the under which contact with the air
sensing system detects a rollover. bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
• Generally, air bags are designed to cially if the occupant is positioned
inflate based upon the severity of a When a rollover is detected, side
and curtain air bags will remain excessively close to the air bag.
collision, its direction, etc. These
two factors determine whether the inflated longer to help provide pro-
sensors produce an electronic tection from ejection, especially
deployment/inflation signal. when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.

2-53
Safety system of your vehicle

You can take steps to help reduce ■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
the risk of being injured by an inflat- WARNING
ing air bag. The greatest risk is sitting
too close to the air bag. An air bag To reduce the risk of serious
needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of injury or death from an inflating
space to inflate. NHTSA recom- air bag, take the following pre-
mends that drivers allow at least 10 cautions:
inches (25 cm) between the center of • NEVER place a child restraint
the steering wheel and the chest. in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain chil-
dren under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle. OHM039102N
• Adjust the front passenger’s When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
and driver's seats as far to the ciently severe impact to the front of
rear as possible while allow- the vehicle, it will automatically
ing you to maintain full con- deploy the front air bags.
trol of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o'clock and 3
o'clock positions.
• Never place anything or any-
one between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.

2-54
■ Driver’s front air bag (2) ■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
WARNING
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when 2
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any

Safety system of your vehicle


objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
OHM039104N the glove box where the pas-
■ Passenger’s front air bag senger's air bag is located.
OHM039103N
Upon deployment, tear seams mold- • Do not install a container of
ed directly into the pad covers will liquid air freshener near the
separate under pressure from the instrument cluster or on the
expansion of the air bags. Further instrument panel surface.
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver or the front passen- OLMB033057
ger forward motion, reducing the risk After complete inflation, the air bag
of head and chest injury. immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.

2-55
Safety system of your vehicle

What to Expect After an Air (Continued)


Noise and smoke from inflating
Bag Inflates air bag
• Always wash exposed skin
After a frontal or side air bag inflates, areas thoroughly with cold When the air bags inflate, they make
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag and mild soap. a loud noise and may produce
inflation will not prevent the driver smoke and powder in the air inside of
from seeing out of the windshield or • Always have an authorized the vehicle. This is normal and is a
being able to steer. Curtain air bags HYUNDAI dealer replace the result of the ignition of the air bag
may remain partially inflated for air bag immediately after inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
some time after they deploy. deployment. Air bags are may feel substantial discomfort in
designed to be used only breathing because of the contact of
once. your chest with both the seat belt and
WARNING the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
After an air bag inflates, take may aggravate asthma for some
the following precautions: people. If you experience breathing
• Open your windows and doors problems after an air bag deploy-
as soon as possible after ment, seek medical attention imme-
impact to reduce prolonged diately.
exposure to the smoke and Though the smoke and powder are
powder released by the inflat- nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
ing air bag. the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
• Do not touch the air bag stor- this is the case, wash and rinse with
age area’s internal compo- cold water immediately and seek
nents immediately after an air medical attention if the symptoms
bag has inflated. The parts persist.
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)

2-56
Occupant Classification Main components of the For example, if a child restraint of the
System (OCS) Occupant Classification System type specified in the regulations is on
• A detection device located within the seat, the occupant classification
■ Type A
the front passenger seat cushion. sensor can detect it and cause the
• Electronic system to determine
air bag to turn OFF. 2
whether the passenger air bag Front passenger seat adult occu-

Safety system of your vehicle


systems should be activated or pants who are properly seated and
deactivated. wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
• An indicator light located on the bag to be automatically turned OFF.
instrument panel which illuminates For small adults it may be turned
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF, however, if the occupant does
OFF" indicating the front passen- not sit in the seat properly (for exam-
OAD035037 ger air bag system is deactivated.
■ Type B ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting
• The instrument panel air bag indi- on the edge of the seat, or by other-
cator light is interconnected with wise being out of position), this could
the OCS. cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
The OCS is designed to detect the You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
presence of a properly-seated front BAG OFF" indicator on the center
passenger and determine if the pas- facia panel. This system detects the
senger's front air bag should be conditions 1-4 in the following table
enabled (may inflate) or not. and activates or deactivates the front
OAD035038
The purpose is to help reduce the passenger air bag based on these
Your vehicle is equipped with an risk of injury or death from an inflat- conditions.
Occupant Classification System ing air bag to certain front passenger
(OCS) in the front passenger's seat. seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automati-
cally turned OFF.

2-57
Safety system of your vehicle

Always be sure that you and all vehi- Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
cle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for Indicator/Warning light Devices
the most effective protection by the Condition detected by the “PASSENGER
air bag and the seat belt. occupant classification system SRS Front passenger
AIR BAG OFF”
The OCS may not function properly if warning light air bag
indicator light
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system. 1. Adult *1 Off Off Activated
These include: 2. Infant * or child restraint
2

• Failing to sit in an upright position. On Off Deactivated


system with 12 months old *3 *4
• Leaning against the door or center
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the 4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
front of the seat. *1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
• Putting their legs on the dashboard passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
or resting them on other locations and posture.
which reduce the passenger *2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-
weight on the front seat. grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
• Reclining the seatback. *4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is
or hip protection wear. a normal condition.
• Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the
seat with inverter charging.

2-58
WARNING
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death: 2
• NEVER put a heavy load in • NEVER ride with the seat-

Safety system of your vehicle


the front seat or seatback back reclined when the
pocket, or hang any items vehicle is moving.
on the front passenger
seat.

OVQ036013NB OLMB033103

• NEVER place your feet on • NEVER place your feet or


the front passenger seat- legs on the dashboard.
back.

OLMB033100 OLMB033102

• NEVER sit with your hips • NEVER lean on the door or


shifted towards the front center console or sit on
of the seat. one side of the front pas-
senger seat.

OLMB033101 OLMB033104
(continued)
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle

(continued)
• Do not sit on the passen- • Do not place electronic
ger seat wearing heavily devices such as laptops,
padded clothes such as DVD player, or conductive
ski wear and hip protector. materials such as water
bottles on the passenger
seat.
• Do not use electronic
ODH035900K ODH035902K devices such as laptops
and satellite radios which
use inverter chargers.

• Do not use car seat • If large quantity of liquid


accessories such as thick has been spilled on the
blankets and cushions passenger seat, the air
which cover up the car bag warning light may
seat surface. illuminate or malfunction.
Therefore, make sure the
seat has been completely
ODH035901K ODH035903K dried before driving the
vehicle.
• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat. These may damage the occupant detection sys-
tem, if they puncture the seat cushion.
• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.
• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been devel-
oped based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may
result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could inter-
fere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.

2-60
Do Not Install a Child Restraint
WARNING in the Front Passenger's Seat
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger 2
seat when the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator is illuminat-

Safety system of your vehicle


ed. During a collision, the air bag
will not inflate if the indicator is
illuminated. Have your passen-
ger reposition himself in the
seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR
B990A01O
BAG OFF" indicator remains illu-
Proper seated position for OCS minated after the passenger
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" repositions himself properly and 1JBH3051
indicator is on when an adult is seat- the vehicle is restarted, have the
passenger move to the rear seat Even though your vehicle is equipped
ed in the front passenger seat, place with the OCS, never install a child
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF because the air bag will not
inflate. restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
position and ask the passenger to sit
An inflating air bag can forcefully
properly (sitting upright with the seat
strike a child or child restraint result-
back in an upright position, centered NOTICE ing in serious or fatal injury.
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
and their feet on the floor). Restart indicator illuminates for approxi-
the engine and have the person mately 4 seconds after the ignition
remain in that position. This will allow switch is in the ON position or
the system to detect the person and after the engine is started. If the
to enable the passenger air bag. If front passenger seat is occupied,
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" the OCS will then classify the front
indicator is still on, ask the passen- passenger after several more sec-
ger to move to the rear seat. onds.

2-61
Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag collision sensors (Continued)


WARNING
• Place the ignition switch in
• NEVER place a rear-facing or WARNING the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
front-facing child restraint in tion when the vehicle is being
the front passenger’s seat of To reduce the risk of an air bag
towed to prevent inadvertent
the vehicle. deploying unexpectedly and
air bag deployment.
causing serious injury or death:
• An inflating frontal air bag • Do not hit or allow any objects • Have all air bag repairs conduct-
could forcefully strike a child to impact the locations where air ed by an authorized HYUNDAI
resulting in serious injury or bags or sensors are installed. dealer.
death.
• Do not perform maintenance
• Always properly restrain chil- on or around the air bag sen-
dren in an appropriate child sors. If the location or angle of
restraint in the rear seat of the the sensors is altered, the air
vehicle. bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off when they should.
in a Collision? • Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
Air bags are not designed to inflate in non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
every collision. There are certain This may adversely affect the
types of accidents in which the air bag collision and air bag deploy-
would not be expected to provide ment performance.
additional protection. These include
rear impacts, second or third colli- (Continued)
sions in multiple impact accidents, as
well as low speed impacts. Damage
to the vehicle indicates a collision
energy absorption, and is not an indi-
cator of whether or not an air bag
should have inflated.
2-62
2

Safety system of your vehicle


1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor

OAD035044/OAD035055/OAD035056/OAD035057/OAD035058

2-63
Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of col-
lisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
OAD035045 impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
OLF034050 bumps or objects on unimproved
Front air bags roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
Front air bags and the driver’s knee carefully on unimproved roads or on
air bag are designed to inflate in a surfaces not designed for vehicle
frontal collision depending on the the traffic to prevent unintended air bag
severity of impact of the front colli- deployment.
sion.
OAD035046
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.

2-64
Air bag non-inflation conditions

Safety system of your vehicle


OAD035048 OAD035049

OAD035047 Front air bags are not designed to Front air bags may not inflate in side
inflate in rear collisions, because impact collisions, because occupants
In certain low-speed collisions the air occupants are moved backward by move in the direction of the collision,
bags may not deploy. The air bags the force of the impact. In this case, and thus in side impacts, front air bag
are designed not to deploy in such inflated air bags would not provide deployment would not provide addi-
cases because they may not provide any additional benefit. tional occupant protection.
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts. However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severi-
ty of impact.

2-65
Safety system of your vehicle

ODH033076 OAD035050 OLF034057


In an angled collision, the force of Just before impact, drivers often Front air bags may not inflate in
impact may direct the occupants in a brake heavily. Such heavy braking rollover accidents because air bag
direction where the air bags would lowers the front portion of the vehicle deployment could not provide protec-
not be able to provide any additional causing it to "ride" under a vehicle tion to the occupants.
benefit, and thus the sensors may with a higher ground clearance. Air However, side and curtain air bags
not deploy any air bags. bags may not inflate in this "under- may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
ride" situation because deceleration over by a side impact collision.
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
"underride" collisions.

2-66
SRS Care
WARNING
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can To reduce the risk of serious
safely service by yourself. If the SRS injury or death, take the follow-
air bag warning light does not illumi- ing precautions:
2
nate when the Engine Start/Stop but-
• Do not attempt to modify or

Safety system of your vehicle


ton is in the ON position, or continu-
disconnect the SRS compo-
ously remains on, have your vehicle
nents or wiring, including the
immediately inspected by an author-
addition of any kind of badges
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
to the pad covers or modifica-
Any work on the SRS system, such tions to the body structure.
OLF034058
as removing, installing, repairing, or
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle any work on the steering wheel, the
• Do not place objects over or
collides with objects such as utility near the air bag modules on
front passenger's panel, front seats
poles or trees, where the point of the steering wheel, instrument
and roof rails must be performed by
impact is concentrated and the colli- panel, or the front passen-
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi- ger’s panel above the glove
Improper handling of the SRS system
cle structure. box.
may result in serious personal injury.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)

2-67
Safety system of your vehicle

Additional Safety Precautions Modifications to accommodate


(Continued) disabilities. If you require modifica-
• If components of the air bag Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is tion to your vehicle to accommodate
system must be discarded, or if a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
the vehicle must be scrapped, moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or Customer Connect Center at 1-877-
certain safety precautions 378-8727.
must be observed. Consult an emergency stop can be thrown
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for against the inside of the vehicle,
the necessary information. against other occupants, or be ejected Adding equipment to or modify-
Failure to follow these precau- from the vehicle. ing your air bag equipped vehicle
tions could increase the risk of Do not use any accessories on seat If you modify your vehicle by changing
personal injury. belts. Devices claiming to improve your vehicle’s frame, bumper system,
occupant comfort or reposition the front end or side sheet metal or ride
seat belt can reduce the protection height, this may affect the operation of
provided by the seat belt and increase your vehicle’s air bag system.
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON position
may cause the air bags to inflate.
2-68
Air Bag Warning Labels

Safety system of your vehicle


OAD035052N/OAD035053N/OAD035054

Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the
air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.

2-69
Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4 Windows ................................................................3-43


Remote Key.........................................................................3-4 Power Windows ...............................................................3-44
Smart Key............................................................................3-8 Sunroof..................................................................3-47
Immobilizer System.........................................................3-12 Sunroof Opening and Closing ......................................3-47
Door Locks............................................................3-14 Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-47
Outside the Vehicle.........................................................3-14 Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-48
Inside the Vehicle ............................................................3-15 Sunshade...........................................................................3-49 3
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-17 Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-49
Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-18 Exterior Features.................................................3-51
Theft-alarm System ............................................3-19 Hood ...................................................................................3-51
Driver Position Memory System........................3-20 Trunk ..................................................................................3-52
Storing Positions into Memory ..................................3-20 Smart Trunk ......................................................................3-55
Easy Access Function ....................................................3-21 Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-58
Steering Wheel .....................................................3-22 Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-61
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-22 Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-63
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-23 Gauges ...............................................................................3-63
Horn....................................................................................3-23 Warning and Indicator lights ........................................3-69
Mirrors...................................................................3-24 LCD Display Messages ..................................................3-80
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-24 LCD Display (For supervision cluster) ..............3-88
Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-40 LCD Display Control........................................................3-88
Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-42 LCD Modes........................................................................3-89
User Settings Mode........................................................3-93
Trip Computer .......................................................3-98 Automatic Climate Control System..................3-133
Conventional Cluster.......................................................3-98 Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-134
Supervision Cluster.......................................................3-102 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-135
Light .....................................................................3-107 System Operation .........................................................3-141
Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-107 System Maintenance....................................................3-143
Interior Lights ................................................................3-115 Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-145
3 Welcome System ...........................................................3-117 Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-148
Wipers and Washers..........................................3-119 Climate Control Additional Features...................3-149
Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-119 Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-149
Windshield Washers .....................................................3-120 Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation ...............................3-149
Driver Assist System .........................................3-121 Storage Compartment .......................................3-150
Rear View Camera ........................................................3-121 Center Console Storage ..............................................3-150
Defroster.............................................................3-122 Sliding Armrest ..............................................................3-150
Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-122 Glove Box........................................................................3-151
Manual Climate Control System.......................3-123 Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-151
Heating and Air Conditioning.....................................3-124 Multi box .........................................................................3-152
System Operation .........................................................3-129
System Maintenance....................................................3-131
Interior Features ................................................3-153
Cup Holder ......................................................................3-153
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-154
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-154
USB Charger...................................................................3-156
Clock.................................................................................3-156
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-157 3
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-157
Luggage Net Holder .....................................................3-158

Convenient features of your vehicle


Convenient features of your vehicle

ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE


Remote Key (if equipped) Locking
WARNING
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and Do not leave the keys in your
trunk. vehicle with unsupervised chil-
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on dren. Unattended children
the remote key. could place the key in the igni-
3. The hazard warning lights will tion switch and may operate
blink and the chime will sound power windows or other con-
once if the lock button is pressed trols, or even make the vehicle
once more within four seconds. move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
OAD045047N
lock button inside the vehicle.
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock i Information
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine. After locking the doors, if you press
the Door Lock button again within
1. Door Lock four seconds, the hazard warning
2. Door Unlock lights will blink and the horn will
3. Trunk Unlock sound one time to confirm that the
4. Panic doors are locked.

3-4
Unlocking Trunk unlocking Panic button (if equipped)
To unlock: To unlock: Press and hold the Panic button (4)
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2) 1. Press and hold the Trunk Unlock for more than one second. The horn
on the remote key. button (3) on the remote key for sounds and hazard warning lights
more than one second. flash for about 30 seconds.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two 2. The hazard warning lights will To cancel the panic mode, press any
times. blink two times. button on the remote key.
3
Two press unlock setting: Once the trunk is opened and then
If you press the Door Unlock but- closed, the trunk will lock automati- Start-up

Convenient features of your vehicle


ton again within four seconds, cally. For more information, refer to the
then all the doors will unlock. "Key Ignition Switch" section in chap-
Two press unlock setting can be i Information ter 5.
changed according to owner's • After unlocking the trunk, the trunk
preference. Press and hold both will lock automatically. NOTICE
Door Lock and Door Unlock but-
tons at the same time until hazard • The word "HOLD" is written on the To prevent damaging the remote
warning lights blink. Now all doors button to inform you that you must key:
will unlock when Door Unlock but- press and hold the button for more • Keep the remote key away from
ton is pressed one time. To than one second. water or any liquid and fire. If the
change the setting back, repeat inside of the remote key gets
this procedure. damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
i Information the car from the warranty.
After unlocking the doors, the doors • Avoid dropping or throwing the
will lock automatically after 30 sec- remote key.
onds unless a door is opened.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.

3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle

Mechanical key Remote key precautions Avoid placing the remote key and
The remote key will not work if any of your mobile phone in the same pants
the following occur: or jacket pocket and always try to
maintain an adequate distance
• The key is in the ignition switch. between the two devices.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
OAD045187N transmitter such as a radio station or
If the remote key does not operate an airport which can interfere with
normally, you can lock or unlock the normal operation of the remote key.
door by using the mechanical key. When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the remote key con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the remote key is in close proximi-
ty to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.

3-6
i Information Battery replacement If you suspect your remote key might
If the remote key is not working prop- have sustained some damage, or
This device complies with Part 15 of you feel your remote key is not work-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
the FCC rules. ing correctly contact an authorized
new one.
Operation is subject to the following HYUNDAI dealer.
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful i Information
interference, and An inappropriately disposed 3
2. This device must accept any interfer- battery can be harmful to the

Convenient features of your vehicle


ence received, including interference environment and human
that may cause undesired operation. health. Dispose the battery
3. Changes or modifications not according to your local law(s)
expressly approved by the party and regulation.
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device. OLMB043011

NOTICE Battery Type: CR2032


To replace the battery:
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that 1. Pry open the rear cover of the
blocks electromagnetic waves to remote key.
the key surface. 2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.

3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart Key (if equipped) Locking i Information


The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out-
side door handle.

Even though you press the outside


door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
OLF044003/Q OAD045001
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, To lock : ACC or ON position.
which you can use to lock or unlock 1. Close all doors, engine hood and • Any door except the trunk is open.
a door (and trunk) and even start the trunk.
engine. 2. Either press the door handle but-
1. Door Lock ton or press the Door Lock button
WARNING
2. Door Unlock (1) on the smart key. Do not leave the Smart Key in
3. Trunk Unlock 3. The hazard warning lights will blink your vehicle with unsupervised
4. Panic and the chime will sound once. children. Unattended children
4. Make sure the doors are locked by could press the Engine Start/
checking the position of the door Stop button and may operate
lock button inside the vehicle. power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.

3-8
Unlocking Two press unlock setting can be Trunk opening
changed according to owner's pref- To open:
erence. Press and hold both Door
Lock and Door Unlock buttons at 1. Carry the smart key.
the same time until hazard warning 2. Either press the trunk handle but-
lights blink. Now all doors will ton or press and hold the Trunk
unlock when Door Unlock button is Unlock button (3) on the smart key
pressed one time. To change the for more than one second.
setting back, repeat this procedure.
3
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.

Convenient features of your vehicle


i Information Once the trunk is opened and then
• The door handle button will only closed, the trunk will lock automati-
operate when the smart key is with- cally.
OAD045001
in 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the
To unlock: i Information
outside door handle and other peo-
1. Carry the Smart Key. ple can also open the doors. The trunk handle button will only oper-
2. Either press the driver’s outside • If you press the front passenger’s ate when the smart key is within 28
door handle button or press the outside door handle, while carrying inches (0.7 m) from the trunk handle.
Door Unlock button (2) on the the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
smart key.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The will lock automatically after 30 sec-
hazard warning lights will blink two onds unless a door is opened.
times.
• Either the driver or front passenger
Two press unlock setting: door can be opened with the door
If you press the driver’s outside handle button when the smart key is
door handle button or Door Unlock within this range.
button on the smart key again with-
in four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.

3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle

Panic button Mechanical key Loss of a smart key


Press and hold the Panic button (4) If the Smart Key does not operate A maximum of two Smart Keys can
for more than one second. The horn normally, you can lock or unlock the be registered to a single vehicle. If
sounds and hazard warning lights door by using the mechanical key. you happen to lose your smart key,
blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel you should immediately take the
the panic mode, press any button on vehicle and remaining keys to your
the Smart Key. authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow
the vehicle, if necessary.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.

For more information, refer to the


"Engine Start/Stop Button" sec-
tion in chapter 5.

NOTICE OAD045042
To prevent damaging the smart key: Press and hold the release button (1)
• Keep the smart key away from and remove the mechanical key (2).
any liquid or fire. Internal circuits Insert the mechanical key into the
may malfunction if the inside of key hole on the door.
the remote key gets damp (from To reinstall the mechanical key, put
liquids or moisture) or if it is heat- the key into the hole and push it until
ed. This can exclude the remote a click sound is heard.
key from warranty coverage.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
3-10
Smart key precautions If the smart key is in close proximity i Information
The smart key will not work if any of to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile This device complies with Part 15 of
the following occur:
phones normal operational signals. the FCC rules.
• The smart key is close to a radio This is especially important when the Operation is subject to the following
transmitter such as a radio station phone is active such as making and three conditions:
or an airport which can interfere receiving calls, text messaging,
with normal operation of the trans- 1. This device may not cause harmful
and/or sending/receiving emails. interference, and 3
mitter. Avoid placing the smart key and your
• The smart key is near a mobile two mobile phone in the same pants or 2. This device must accept any inter-

Convenient features of your vehicle


way radio system or a cellular jacket pocket and always try to main- ference received, including interfer-
phone. tain an adequate distance between ence that may cause undesired
the two devices. operation.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle. 3. Changes or modifications not
CAUTION expressly approved by the party
When the smart key does not work
responsible for compliance could
correctly, open and close the door
Keep the smart key away from void the user’s authority to operate
with the mechanical key. If you have
electromagnetic materials that the device.
a problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.

3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle

Battery replacement If you suspect your smart key might Immobilizer System
If the Smart Key is not working prop- have sustained some damage, or (if equipped)
erly, try replacing the battery with a you feel your smart key is not work-
The immobilizer system protects your
new one. ing correctly, contact an authorized
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
HYUNDAI dealer.
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
i Information When the ignition switch is placed in
An inappropriately disposed the ON position, the immobilizer sys-
battery can be harmful to the tem indicator should come on briefly,
environment and human then go off. If the indicator starts to
health. Dispose the battery blink, the system does not recognize
according to your local law(s) the coding of the key.
and regulation(s). Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position again.
OLF044008 The system may not recognize your
Battery Type: CR2032 key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
To replace the battery:
chain) is near the key. The engine
1. Pry open the rear cover of the may not start because the metal may
smart key. interrupt the transponder signal from
2. Remove the old battery and insert transmitting normally.
the new battery. If the system repeatedly does not
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the recognize the coding of the key, it is
smart key. recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-12
Do not attempt to alter this system or i Information
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make This device complies with Part 15 of
your vehicle inoperable. the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
WARNING three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
In order to prevent theft of your interference, and 3
vehicle, do not leave spare keys 2. This device must accept any interfer-
anywhere in your vehicle. Your

Convenient features of your vehicle


ence received, including interference
immobilizer password is a cus- that may cause undesired operation.
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential. 3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
NOTICE void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.

3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle

DOOR LOCKS
Operating Door Locks from Remote key i Information
Outside the Vehicle
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
Mechanical key and door mechanisms may not work
■ Remote key ■ Smart key properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
• Two press unlock setting can be
OAD045048N
changed with the remote key or in
To lock the doors, press the Door the User Settings Mode in the clus-
OADA045454 Lock button (1) on the remote key. ter (if equipped).
If you lock the driver’s door with a Press the Door Unlock button (2) on
mechanical key, all vehicle doors will the remote key, the driver’s door will
lock. If you unlock the driver’s door unlock. If you press the Door Unlock
with a mechanical key, the driver's button on the remote key again with-
door will unlock and the passenger in four seconds, then all the doors
doors will unlock according to the will unlock.
current two press unlock setting.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door
may be opened by pulling the door handle.
handle.
When closing the door, push the
When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors
door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.
are closed securely.

3-14
Smart key Press the button on the driver’s out- Operating Door Locks from
side door handle while carrying the Inside the Vehicle
Smart Key with you or press the Door
Unlock button on the Smart Key, the With the door lock button
driver’s door will unlock. If you press
the button on the front passenger’s
outside door, all doors will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they 3
may be opened by pulling the door L o ck
handle.

Convenient features of your vehicle


U n l o ck
When closing the door, push the
OAD045001 door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Door Door
Unlock Lock
i Information OAD045003
• In cold and wet climates, door lock • To unlock a door, pull the door lock
and door mechanisms may not work button (1) to the "Unlock" position.
properly due to freezing conditions. The red mark (2) on the door lock
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi- button will be visible.
ple times in rapid succession with • To lock a door, push the door lock
either the vehicle key or door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If
OLF044003 switch, the system may stop operat- the door is locked properly, the red
To lock the doors, press the button on ing temporarily in order to protect mark (2) on the door lock button
the outside door handle while carrying the circuit and prevent damage to will not be visible.
the Smart Key with you or press the system components. • To open a door, pull the door han-
Door Lock button on the Smart Key. • Two press unlock setting can be dle (3) outward.
changed with the smart key or in the
User Settings Mode in the cluster (if
equipped).

3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle

• If the inner door handle of the dri- With the central door lock
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is switch WARNING
pulled when the door lock button is
■ Driver’s door ■ Passenger’s door The doors should always be
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens. fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
• Front doors cannot be locked if the doors are unlocked, the risk of
key is in the ignition switch and any being thrown from the vehicle in
front door is open. a crash is increased.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open. WARNING

i Information Do not leave children or animals


OAD045004/OAD045044N
unattended in your vehicle. An
If a power door lock ever fails to func- enclosed vehicle can become
tion while you are in the vehicle try When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all extremely hot, causing death or
one or more of the following tech- vehicle doors will lock. serious injury to unattended
niques to exit: children or animals who cannot
When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all
• Operate the door unlock feature vehicle doors will unlock. escape the vehicle. Children
repeatedly (both electronic and might operate features of the
If the key is in the ignition switch and vehicle that could injure them,
manual) while simultaneously
any door is opened, the doors will not or they could encounter other
pulling on the door handle.
lock even though the lock button (1) of harm, possibly from someone
• Operate the other door locks and the central door lock switch is pressed.
handles, front and rear. gaining entry to the vehicle.
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
• Lower a front window and use the any door is opened, the doors will
mechanical key to unlock the door not lock even though the lock button
from outside. (1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.

3-16
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features Shift lever auto door lock
WARNING
Impact sensing door unlock All doors will be automatically locked
Always secure your vehicle. when shifting the shift lever out of P
All doors will be automatically
(Park) with the engine running.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked unlocked when an impact causes the
increases the potential risk to air bags to deploy.
you or others from someone You can activate or deactivate the
hiding in your vehicle. Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
Speed sensing door lock the User Settings Mode on the LCD 3
To secure your vehicle, while All doors will be automatically locked
depressing the brake, move the display.

Convenient features of your vehicle


when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph
shift lever to the P (Park) posi- (15 km/h).
tion, engage the parking brake, For more information, refer to the
and place the ignition switch in All of the doors will be automatically "LCD Display" section in this
the LOCK/OFF position, close unlocked after the engine is turned off. chapter.
all windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.

CAUTION
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause dam-
age or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.

3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle

Child-Protector Rear Door locks To lock the child safety lock, insert a
screwdriver (1) into the hole and turn
it to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.

WARNING
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
OAD045005N the vehicle. The rear door safety
locks should always be used
The child safety lock is provided to whenever children are in the
help prevent children seated in the vehicle.
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open if the
inner door handle is pulled.

3-18
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system helps to protect your Once the security system is set, i Information
vehicle and valuables. The horn will opening any door, the trunk, or the
sound and the hazard warning lights hood without using the remote key or • Do not lock the doors until all pas-
will blink continuously if any of the smart key will cause the alarm to sengers have left the vehicle. If the
following occurs: activate. remaining passenger leaves the
- A door is opened without using the The Theft Alarm System will not set if vehicle when the system is armed,
remote key or smart key. the hood, the trunk, or any door is the alarm will be activated.
- The trunk is opened without using not fully closed. If the system will not • If the vehicle is not disarmed with the 3
the remote key or smart key. set, check the hood, the trunk, or the remote key or smart key, open the
doors are fully closed. doors by using the mechanical key

Convenient features of your vehicle


- The engine hood is opened. and place the ignition switch in the
Do not attempt to alter this system or
The alarm continues for 30 seconds, add other devices to it. ON position (for remote key) or start
then the system resets. To turn off the engine (for smart key) by direct-
the alarm, unlock the doors with ly pressing the ignition switch with
the remote key or smart key. the smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati- • When the system is disarmed but a
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock door or trunk is not opened within 30
the doors and the trunk. For the sys- seconds, the system will be rearmed.
tem to activate, you must lock the
doors and the trunk from outside the
vehicle with the remote key or smart
key or by pressing the button on the
outside of the door handles with the
smart key in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.

3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle

DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)


Storing Positions into Memory
WARNING
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
Never attempt to operate the driv- (Park) while the ignition switch is
er position memory system while in the ON position.
the vehicle is moving. 2. Adjust the driver’s seat position,
This could result in loss of con- side view mirror position and
trol, and an accident causing instrument panel illumination
death, serious injury, or property intensity to positions comfortable
damage. for the driver.
3. Press the SET button. The system
OAD045043L will beep once and notify you
"Press button to save settings"on
The Driver Position Memory System the LCD display.
is provided to store and recall the fol-
lowing memory settings with a sim- 4. Press one of the memory buttons
ple button operation. (1 or 2) within 5 seconds. The sys-
tem will beep twice when the mem-
- Driver’s seat position ory has been successfully stored.
- Side view mirror position 5.
- Instrument panel illumination intensity
If the battery is disconnected, the
position memory will be lost and the
driving positions must be stored in
the system again.
If the Driver Position Memory
System does not operate normally, OLF044403N/OLF044404N
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will
appear on the LCD display.

3-20
Recalling positions from memory NOTICE Easy Access Function
1. Check that the shift lever is in P When exiting the vehicle the driver’s
• While recalling the "1" memory
(Park) while the ignition switch is seat will move rearward when the
position, pressing the SET or 1
in the ON position. engine is turned off and the shift lever
button temporarily stops the
2. Press the desired memory button adjustment of the recalled memo- in P (Park).
(1 or 2). The system will beep once, ry position. Pressing the 2 button When entering the vehicle the dri-
and then the driver’s seat position, recalls the "2" memory position. ver’s seat will move forward when the
side view mirror position and instru-
• While recalling the "2" memory ignition switch is placed to the ACC 3
ment panel illumination intensity position.
position, pressing the SET or 2

Convenient features of your vehicle


will automatically adjust to the You can activate or deactivate the
button temporarily stops the
stored positions. Easy Access Function from the User
adjustment of the recalled memo-
3. ry position. Pressing the 1 button Settings Mode on the LCD display.
recalls the "1" memory position.
• While recalling the stored posi- For more information, refer to the
tions, pressing one of the con- "LCD Display" section in this
trol buttons for the driver’s seat, chapter.
side view mirror or instrument
panel illumination will cause the
movement of that component to
OADA045189/OADA045190
stop and move in the direction
"Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will that the control button is
appear on the LCD display. pressed.

3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle

STEERING WHEEL
Electric Power Steering (EPS) i Information (Continued)
The system assists you with steering • When an error is detected from the
The following symptoms may occur EPS, the assistant function of steer-
the vehicle. If the engine is turned off during normal vehicle operation:
or if the power steering system ing effort will not be activated in
becomes inoperative, you may still • The steering effort may be high order to prevent fatal accidents.
steer the vehicle, but it will require immediately after placing the igni- Dashboard warning lights may be
increased steering effort. tion switch in the ON position. on or the steering effort may be
This happens as the system per- high. When the following symptoms
Should you notice any change in the
forms the EPS system diagnostics. occur, immediately drive the vehicle
effort required to steer during normal
When the diagnostics is completed, to a safe area and check it.
vehicle operation, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI the steering wheel will return to its
dealer. normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
CAUTION in the ON or OFF position.
If the Electric Power Steering • Motor noise may be heard when the
System does not operate nor- vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-
mally, the warning light ( ) will ing speed.
illuminate on the instrument • When you operate the steering
cluster. You may steer the vehi- wheel in low temperature, abnormal
cle, but it will require increased noise may occur. If temperature
steering efforts. Take your vehi- rises, the noise will disappear. This
cle to an authorized HYUNDAI is a normal condition.
dealer and have the system (Continued)
checked as soon as possible.

3-22
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering Horn
Adjust the steering wheel so it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument panel warning lights and
gauges. After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and down to
be certain it is locked in position. 3
Always adjust the position of the

Convenient features of your vehicle


steering wheel before driving.
OAD045006
WARNING
To change the steering wheel angle OAD045008
NEVER adjust the steering and height:
wheel while driving. This may 1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1). To sound the horn, press the area
cause loss of vehicle control indicated by the horn symbol on your
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the steering wheel (see illustration). The
resulting in an accident. desired angle (2) and height (3). horn will operate only when this area
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to is pressed.
lock the steering wheel in place.
NOTICE
i Information Do not strike the horn severely to
After adjustment, sometimes the lock operate it, or hit it with your fist.
release lever may not lock the steering Do not press on the horn with a
wheel. It is not a malfunction. This sharp-pointed object.
occurs when two gears are not
engaged correctly. In this case, adjust
the steering wheel again and then lock
the steering wheel.

3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle

MIRRORS
Inside Rearview Mirror NOTICE
WARNING
Before you start driving, adjust the When cleaning the mirror, use a
rearview mirror to the center on the To prevent serious injury during paper towel or similar material
view through the rear window. an accident or deployment of dampened with glass cleaner. Do
the air bag, do not modify the not spray glass cleaner directly on
rearview mirror and do not the mirror as that may cause the
WARNING install a wide mirror. liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo WARNING
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with NEVER adjust the mirror while
your vision through the rear driving. This may cause loss of
window. vehicle control resulting in an
accident.

3-24
Day/night rearview mirror Blue Link® center (if equipped) Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped) with HomeLink® system,
compass and Blue Link®
(for U.S.A)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
Night with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink® 3
Wireless Control System. During

Convenient features of your vehicle


nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
OAD045011N
Day cle is pointed. The HomeLink®
OAD045009
For details, refer to the Blue Link® Universal Transceiver allows you to
Make this adjustment before you Owner’s Guide, Navigation Manual activate your garage door(s), electric
start driving and while the day/night or Audio Manual. gate, home lighting, etc.
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.

3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Your mirror will automatically dim


Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror upon detecting glare from the vehi-
(if equipped) cles traveling behind you. The auto-
The NVS® Mirror automatically dimming function can be controlled
reduces glare by monitoring light lev- by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF
els in the front and the rear of the button:
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the 1. Pressing and holding the button
automatic dimming control feature. for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-
ming function OFF which is indi-
For more information regarding cated by the green Status
OAD045045N NVS® mirrors and other applica- Indicator LED turning off.
(1) Telematics button tions, please refer to the Gentex 2. Pressing and holding the button
website: for 3 seconds again turns the auto-
(2) Telematics button
www.gentex.com dimming function ON which is indi-
(3) Telematics button cated by the green Status Indicator
(4) Compass control button & LED turning on.
Dimming ON/OFF button The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
(5) Status indicator LED tion each time the vehicle is started.
(6) Channel 1 button
(7) Channel 2 button Z-Nav™ Compass Display
(8) Channel 3 button The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
(9) Compass display also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
(10) Rear light sensor Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

3-26
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF. 3
2. Press and release the button

Convenient features of your vehicle


again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag-


netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting based
on where you live.

B520C05NF

3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle

To adjust the Zone setting: If you need to recalibrate the com- Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
1. Determine the desired Zone pass: Control System
Number based upon your current 1. Press and hold the button for The HomeLink® Wireless Control
location on the Zone Map. more than 9 seconds. When the System can replace up to three
2. Press and hold the button for 6 compass memory is cleared a "C" hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
seconds, the current Zone will appear in the display. transmitters with a single built-in
Number will appear on the display. 2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir- device. This innovative feature will
cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). learn the radio frequency codes of
3. Pressing and holding the button
most current transmitters to operate
again will cause the numbers to
devices such as gate operators,
increment (Note: they will repeat
garage door openers, entry door
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
locks, security systems, even home
the button when the desired Zone
lighting. Both standard and rolling
Number appears on the display
code-equipped transmitters can be
will set the new Zone.
programmed by following the out-
4. Within about 5 seconds the com- lined procedures.
pass will start displaying a com-
Additional HomeLink® information
pass heading again.
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
There are some conditions that can Retain the original transmitter of the
cause changes to the vehicle mag- RF device you are programming for
nets, such as installing a ski rack or use in other vehicles as well as for
a CB antenna. Body repair work on future HomeLink® programming. It is
the vehicle can also cause changes also suggested that upon the sale of
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In the vehicle, the programmed
these situations, the compass will HomeLink® buttons be erased for
need to be re-calibrated to quickly security purposes.
correct these changes.

3-28
Programming HomeLink® Programming
WARNING
Please note the following:
Flashing
Before programming HomeLink® • When programming a garage door
to a garage door opener or gate opener, it is advised to park the
operator, make sure people and vehicle outside of the garage.
objects are out of the way of the • It is recommended that a new bat-
device to prevent potential harm tery be placed in the hand-held
or damage. Do not use the transmitter of the device being pro- 3
HomeLink® with any garage door grammed to HomeLink® for quicker

Convenient features of your vehicle


opener that lacks the safety stop training and accurate transmission
and reverse features required by of the radio-frequency signal.
U.S. federal safety standards (this • Some vehicles may require the
includes any garage door opener ignition switch to be placed in the ODH044413N
model manufactured before April ACC (or "Accessories") position for
1, 1982). A garage door that can- To train most devices, follow these
programming and/or operation of instructions:
not detect an object - signaling HomeLink®.
the door to stop and reverse - 1. For first-time programming, press
does not meet current U.S. feder- • In the event that there are still pro- and hold the two outside buttons
al safety standards. Using a gramming difficulties or questions ( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1
garage door opener without after following the programming and Channel 3, until the indicator
these features increases the risk steps listed below, contact light begins to flash (after 10 sec-
of serious injury or death. HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com onds). Release both buttons. Do
or by calling 1-800-355-3515. not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.

3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle

Flashing i Information 4. Press and hold for 5 seconds and


release the programmed HomeLink®
Some devices may require you to button up to two separate times to
replace this Programming step 3 with activate the door. If the door does not
procedures noted in the "Gate activate, press and hold the just-
Operator/Canadian Programming" trained HomeLink® button and
chapter. If the HomeLink® indicator observe the indicator light.
light does not change to a rapidly • If the indicator light stays on con-
blinking light after performing these stantly, programming is complete
steps, contact HomeLink® at and your device should activate
www.homelink.com. when the HomeLink® button is
ODH044414N pressed and released.
2. Position the end of your hand-held • If the indicator light blinks rapidly
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) for 2 seconds and then turns to a
away from the HomeLink® button constant light, continue with
you wish to program while keeping "Programming" steps 5-7 to com-
the indicator light in view. plete the programming of a rolling
3. Simultaneously press and hold code equipped device (most com-
both the HomeLink® and hand- monly a garage door opener).
held transmitter buttons until the 5. At the garage door opener receiver
HomeLink® indicator light changes (motor-head unit) in the garage,
from a slow to a rapid blinking locate the "learn" or "smart" button.
light. Now you may release both This can usually be found where
the HomeLink® and hand-held the hanging antenna wire is
transmitter buttons. attached to the motor-head unit.

3-30
6. Firmly press and release the Gate operator & Canadian program- Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
"learn" or "smart" button. (The ming button
name and color of the button vary During programming, your handheld To program a device to HomeLink®
by manufacturer). There are 30 transmitter may automatically stop using a HomeLink® button previously
seconds to initiate step 7. transmitting. Continue to press the trained, follow these steps:
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly Integrated HomeLink® Wireless 1.Press and hold the desired
press, hold for 2 seconds and Control System button (note steps 2 HomeLink® button. DO NOT
release the programmed through 3 in the Programming portion release the button. 3
HomeLink® button. Repeat the of this document) while you press
"press/hold/release" sequence a and re-press ("cycle") your handheld 2.The indicator light will begin to flash

Convenient features of your vehicle


second time, and, depending on transmitter every two seconds until after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the brand of the garage door the frequency signal has been the HomeLink® button, proceed
opener (or other rolling code learned. The indicator light will flash with "Programming" step 2.
equipped device), repeat this slowly and then rapidly after several
sequence a third time to complete seconds upon successful training. For questions or comments, contact
the programming process. HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or
Operating HomeLink® 1-800-355-3515.
HomeLink® should now activate your To operate, simply press and release
rolling code equipped device. the programmed HomeLink® button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.

3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle

Erasing HomeLink® buttons i Information Electric chromic mirror (ECM)


Individual buttons cannot be erased. with compass and HomeLink®
This device complies with Part 15 of system (for Canada)
However, to erase all three pro-
the FCC Rules.
grammed buttons: Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Operation is subject to the following Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
1. Press and hold the two outer
three conditions: with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
HomeLink® buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash after 10 1. This device may not cause harmful Display and an Integrated HomeLink®
seconds. interference, and Wireless Control System.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold 2. This device must accept any inter- During nighttime driving, this feature
for longer than 20 seconds. ference received, including interfer- will automatically detect and reduce
ence that may cause undesired rearview mirror glare while the com-
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
operation. pass indicates the direction the vehi-
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro- 3. The transceiver has been tested and cle is pointed. The HomeLink®
grammed at any time following the complies with FCC and Industry Universal Transceiver allows you to
appropriate steps in the Canada rules. Changes or modifica- activate your garage door(s), electric
Programming chapters above. tions not expressly approved by the gate, home lighting, etc.
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
NVS® is a registered trademark and operate the device.
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

3-32
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision The auto-dimming function can be
Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror controlled by pressing the ON/OFF
(if equipped) button:
The NVS® Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light lev- 1. Pressing the button turns the auto-
els in the front and the rear of the dimming function OFF which is
vehicle. Any object that obstructs indicated by the green Status
either light sensor will degrade the Indicator LED turning off. 3
automatic dimming control feature.
2. Pressing the button again turns

Convenient features of your vehicle


the auto-dimming function ON
For more information regarding which is indicated by the green
OAD045046N NVS® mirrors and other applica- Status Indicator LED turning on.
(1) Channel 1 button tions, please refer to the Gentex
website: The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
(2) Channel 2 button tion each time the vehicle is started.
www.gentex.com
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button Z-Nav™ Compass Display
(5) Rear light sensor The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button also equipped with a Z-Nav™
(7) Compass control button Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
(8) Compass display Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle

Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the but-
ton and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag-


netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting
based on where you live.

B520C05NF

3-34
To adjust the Zone setting: There are some conditions that can If you need to recalibrate the com-
1. Determine the desired Zone cause changes to the vehicle mag- pass:
Number based upon your current nets, such as installing a ski rack or 1. Press and hold the button for
location on the Zone Map. a CB antenna. Body repair work on more than 6 seconds. When the
the vehicle can also cause changes compass memory is cleared a "C"
2. Press and hold the button for to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
more than 3 but less than 6 sec- will appear in the display.
these situations, the compass will
onds, the current Zone Number need to be re-calibrated to quickly 2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-
will appear on the display. correct these changes. cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). 3
3. Pressing and holding the button

Convenient features of your vehicle


again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.

3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle

Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Programming HomeLink®


Control System WARNING
Please note the following:
The HomeLink® Wireless Control Before programming HomeLink® • When programming a garage door
System can replace up to three hand- to a garage door opener or gate opener, it is advised to park the
held radio-frequency (RF) transmit- operator, make sure people and vehicle outside of the garage.
ters with a single built-in device. This objects are out of the way of the
innovative feature will learn the radio • It is recommended that a new bat-
device to prevent potential harm tery be placed in the hand-held
frequency codes of most current or damage. Do not use the
transmitters to operate devices such transmitter of the device being pro-
HomeLink® with any garage door grammed to HomeLink® for quicker
as gate operators, garage door open- opener that lacks the safety stop
ers, entry door locks, security sys- training and accurate transmission
and reverse features required by of the radio-frequency signal.
tems, even home lighting. Both stan- U.S. federal safety standards (this
dard and rolling code-equipped trans- • Some vehicles may require the
includes any garage door opener ignition switch to be placed in the
mitters can be programmed by fol- model manufactured before April
lowing the outlined procedures. ACC (or "Accessories") position for
1, 1982). A garage door that can- programming and/or operation of
Additional HomeLink® information not detect an object - signaling
can be found at: www.homelink.com HomeLink®.
the door to stop and reverse -
or by calling 1-800-355-3515. does not meet current U.S. feder- • In the event that there are still pro-
Retain the original transmitter of the al safety standards. Using a gramming difficulties or questions
RF device you are programming for garage door opener without after following the programming
use in other vehicles as well as for these features increases the risk steps listed below, contact
future HomeLink® programming. It is of serious injury or death. HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
also suggested that upon the sale of or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® buttons be erased for
security purposes.

3-36
Rolling code programming To train rolling code devices, follow 4. Press and hold the just-trained
Rolling code devices which are these instructions: HomeLink® button and observe
"code-protected" and manufactured 1. At the garage door opener receiv- the red Status Indicator LED. If the
after 1996 may be determined by the er (motor-head unit) in the garage, indicator light stays on constantly,
following: locate the "learn" or "smart" but- programming is complete and
ton. This can usually be found your device should activate.
• Reference the device owner’s
manual for verification. where the hanging antenna wire is 5. To program the remaining two
• The handheld transmitter appears to
attached to the motor-head unit. HomeLink® buttons, follow either 3
Exact location and color of the but- steps 1 through 4 above for other
program the HomeLink® Universal ton may vary by garage door Rolling Code devices or steps 2

Convenient features of your vehicle


Transceiver but does not activate the opener brand. If there is difficulty through 5 in Standard Programming
device. locating the training button, refer- for standard devices.
• Press and hold the trained ence the device owner’s manual or
HomeLink button. The device has please visit our Web site at
the rolling code feature if the indi- www.homelink.com.
cator light flashes rapidly and then 2. Firmly press and release the
turns solid after 2 seconds. "learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light"). You
will have 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for two seconds and
then release the desired
HomeLink® button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the pro-
gramming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)

3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle

Standard programming 4. While continuing to hold the but- Gate operator & Canadian program-
To train most devices, follow these tons the red Indicator Status LED ming
instructions: will flash slowly and then rapidly During programming, your handheld
after HomeLink® successfully transmitter may automatically stop
1. For first-time programming, press trains to the frequency signal from
and hold the two outside buttons, transmitting. Continue to press the
the hand-held transmitter. Release Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
HomeLink® Channel 1 and both buttons.
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi- Control System button (note
cator light begins to flash (after 20 5. Press and hold the just-trained steps 2 through 4 in the Standard
seconds). Release both buttons. HomeLink® button and observe Programming portion of this docu-
Do not hold the buttons for longer the red Status Indicator LED. If the ment) while you press and re-press
than 30 seconds. indicator light stays on constantly, ("cycle") your handheld transmitter
programming is complete and every two seconds until the frequen-
2. Position the end of your hand-held your device should activate when cy signal has been learned. The indi-
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) the HomeLink® button is pressed cator light will flash slowly and then
away from the HomeLink® buttons and released. rapidly after several seconds upon
while keeping the indicator light in successful training.
view. 6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2
3. Simultaneously press and hold through 5.
both the HomeLink® and hand- Operating HomeLink®
held transmitter button. DO NOT To operate, simply press and release
release the buttons until step 4 the programmed HomeLink® button.
has been completed. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.

3-38
Reprogramming a single Erasing HomeLink® buttons i Information
HomeLink® button Individual buttons cannot be erased.
To program a new device to a previ- This device complies with Part 15 of
However, to erase all three pro-
ously trained HomeLink® button, fol- the FCC Rules.
grammed buttons:
low these steps: Operation is subject to the following
1. Press and hold the two outer
1. Press and hold the desired three conditions:
HomeLink® buttons until the indi-
HomeLink® button. Do NOT cator light begins to flash-after 20 1. This device may not cause harmful
release until step 4 has been com- seconds. interference, and 3
pleted. 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold 2. This device must accept any interfer-

Convenient features of your vehicle


2. When the indicator light begins to for longer than 30 seconds. ence received, including interference
flash slowly (after 20 seconds), that may cause undesired operation.
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
position the handheld transmitter 1 Control System is now in the training 3. The transceiver has been tested and
to 3 inches away from the (learn) mode and can be pro- complies with FCC and Industry
HomeLink® surface. grammed at any time following the Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
3. Press and hold the handheld appropriate steps in the Programming tions not expressly approved by the
transmitter button. The HomeLink® chapters above. party responsible for compliance
indicator light will flash, first slowly could void the user’s authority to
and then rapidly. operate the device.
NVS® is a registered trademark and
4. When the indicator light begins to Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
flash rapidly, release both buttons. Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink® is a registered trademark
HomeLink® button and observe owned by Johnson Controls,
the red Status Indicator LED. If the Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
indicator light stays on constantly, FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
programming is complete and
your new device should activate. IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle

Side View Mirrors Use your interior rearview mirror or Blind spot mirror
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.

WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the side
view mirrors while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
OLF044477N

OAD045014

Be sure to adjust mirror angles


CAUTION
before driving. • Do not scrape ice off the mir-
Your vehicle is equipped with both ror face; this may damage the
left-hand and right-hand side view surface of the glass.
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted • If the mirror is jammed with
remotely with the remote switch. The ice, do not adjust the mirror by
mirror heads can be folded to pre- force. Use an approved spray
vent damage during an automatic de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) OLF044478N
car wash or when passing through a spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
narrow street. with very warm water, or move The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a
The right side view mirror is convex. the vehicle to a warm place supplemental mirror that reduces the
Objects seen in the mirror are closer and allow the ice to melt. driver’s blind spot by showing the
than they appear. rear side area of the vehicle. The
blind spot mirror is equipped on the
left-hand side view mirror.

3-40
Side view mirrors control NOTICE
WARNING
• The mirrors stop moving when
• Always check the road condi- they reach the maximum adjust-
tion while driving for unex- ing angles, but the motor contin-
pected situations even though ues to operate while the switch
the vehicle is equipped with a is pressed. Do not press the
blind spot mirror. switch longer than necessary,
• The blind spot mirror is a the motor may be damaged. 3
device made for convenience. • Do not attempt to adjust the side

Convenient features of your vehicle


Do not solely rely on the mir- view mirrors by hand or the
ror but always pay attention to motor may be damaged.
traffic around you.
OAD045015N

NOTICE Adjusting the rearview mirrors:


1. Move the lever (1) towards the
Do not clean the mirror with harsh L(Left) or R(Right) to select the
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum rearview mirror you would like to
based cleaning products. adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
switch to position the selected mir-
ror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, place the lever
(1) in the center to prevent inad-
vertent adjustment.

3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle

Folding the side view mirrors Reverse Parking Aid Function The side view mirrors will automati-
(if equipped) cally revert to their original positions if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition switch is placed to
either the LOCK/OFF position or
the ACC position.
• The shift lever is moved to any
position except R (Reverse).
• The remote control side view mir-
ror switch is not selected.

OAD045016

To fold the side view mirrors, grasp OADA045461


the housing of the mirror and then When you move the shift lever to the
fold it toward the rear of the vehicle. R (Reverse) position, the side view
mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid
with driving in reverse. The position
of the side view mirror switch (1)
determines whether or not the mir-
rors will move:
Left/Right : When either the L (Left) or
R (Right) switch is select-
ed, both side view mirrors
will move.
Neutral : When neither switch is select-
ed, the side view mirrors will
not move.

3-42
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch 3
(5) Window opening and closing

Convenient features of your vehicle


(6) Automatic power window
(7) Power window lock switch

OAD045020N

3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle

Power Windows i Information Window opening and closing


The ignition switch must be in the ON • In cold and wet climates, power win-
position to be able to raise or lower dows may not work properly due to
the windows. Each door has a Power freezing conditions.
Window switch to control that door’s
window. The driver has a Power • While driving with the rear win-
Window Lock switch which can block dows down or with the sunroof (if
the operation of passenger windows. equipped) opened (or partially
The power windows will operate for opened), your vehicle may demon-
approximately 30 seconds after the strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
ignition switch is placed in the ACC noise. This noise is normal and can
or LOCK/OFF position. However, if be reduced or eliminated by taking
the front doors are opened, the the following actions. If the noise
Power Windows cannot be operated occurs with one or both of the rear OAD045038

even within the 30 second period. windows down, partially lower both To open:
front windows approximately one
Press the window switch down to the
inch. If you experience the noise
WARNING first detent position (5). Release the
with the sunroof open, slightly close
switch when you want the window to
the sunroof.
To avoid serious injury or death, stop.
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows To close:
while driving.
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.

3-44
Auto down window (if equipped) To reset the power windows Automatic reverse (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch If the power windows do not operate
momentarily to the second detent normally, the automatic power win-
position (6) completely lowers the dow system must be reset as follows:
window even when the switch is 1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
released. To stop the window at the position.
desired position while the window is
2. Close the window and continue
in operation, pull up or press down
pulling up on the power window 3
and release the switch.
switch for at least one second.

Convenient features of your vehicle


If the power windows do not operate
Auto up/down window properly after resetting, have the
(if equipped) system checked by an authorized
Pressing or pulling up the power win- HYUNDAI dealer. OLF044032
dow switch momentarily to the sec- If a window senses any obstacle while
ond detent position (6) completely it is closing automatically, it will stop
lowers or lifts the window even when and lower approximately 12 inches (30
the switch is released. To stop the cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
window at the desired position while If the window detects the resistance
the window is in operation, pull up or while the power window switch is
press down and release the switch. pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal fea-
ture, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.

3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle

i Information Power window lock switch


WARNING
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the "Auto Up" feature is Do not allow children to play
used by fully pulling up the switch to with the power windows. Keep
the second detent. the driver's door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
WARNING tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
Make sure body parts or other dow operation by a child.
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to NOTICE
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
OAD045021N • To prevent possible damage to
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) the power window system, do
in diameter caught between the The driver can disable the power not open or close two windows
window glass and the upper win- window switches on the rear passen- or more at the same time. This
dow channel may not be detected ger's doors by pressing the power will also ensure the longevity of
by the automatic reverse window window lock switch. the fuse.
and the window will not stop and When the power window lock switch
reverse direction. • Never try to operate the main
is pressed: switch on the driver's door and
• The driver's master control can only the individual door window
operate the driver's power window. switch in opposite directions at
• The front passenger's control can- the same time. If this is done, the
not operate the front passenger's window will stop and cannot be
power window. opened or closed.
• The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.

3-46
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
Sunroof opening and closing Sliding the sunroof
Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position completely
opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation, press 3
the sunroof control lever backward or

Convenient features of your vehicle


forward and release the switch.
OAD045022
i Information
If your vehicle is equipped with a OAD045023
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your To minimize wind noise while driving,
sunroof with the sunroof control To open: it is recommended that you drive with
switch located on the overhead con- Press the sunroof control lever back- the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sole. ward to the first detent position. sunroof about 2 inch (5 cm) before the
Release the switch when you want maximum slide open position).
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition the sunroof to stop.
switch is in the ON position. NOTICE
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever forward To prevent damage to the sunroof
to the first detent position. Release the and the motor, do not continue to
switch when you want the sunroof to press the sunroof control lever
stop. after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).

3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle

Tilting the sunroof NOTICE


WARNING
• Periodically remove any dirt that
• Make sure heads, other body may accumulate on the sunroof
parts or other objects are guide rail or between the sun-
safely out of the way before roof and roof panel which can
closing the sunroof to avoid make a noise.
injuries or vehicle damage. • Do not try to open the sunroof
• Never adjust the sunroof or when the temperature is below
sunshade while driving. This freezing or when the sunroof is
may cause loss of vehicle con- covered with snow or ice as the
trol resulting in an accident. motor could be damaged.
• To avoid serious injury or
OAD045024
death, do not extend your i Information
Tilt the sunroof open: head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving. After washing the vehicle or after a
Push the sunroof control lever rain, be sure to wipe off the water on
upward until the sunroof moves to the sunroof before operating the sun-
the desired position. roof.

To close the sunroof:


Push the sunroof control lever forward
until the sunroof moves to the desired
position.

3-48
Sunshade Resetting the sunroof 4. Push the control lever forward
Sunroof needs to be reset if the fol- about 10 seconds.
lowing occurs : - When the sunroof is in the closed
- Battery is discharged or discon- position :
nected or the related fuse has been The glass will tilt and slightly
replaced or disconnected move up and down.
- The one-touch sliding function of - When the sunroof is in the tilt
the sunroof does not normally oper- position: 3
ate The glass will slightly move up

Convenient features of your vehicle


and down.
Reset procedure :
OAD045037 1. Place the ignition switch to the ON Do not release the lever until the
position or start the engine. It is operation is completed.
The sunshade will open automatical- recommended to reset the sunroof If you release the lever during opera-
ly with the sunroof when the glass while the engine is running. tion, start the procedure again from
panel moves. If you want it closed, step 2.
move the sunshade manually. 2. Push the control lever forward. The
sunroof will close completely or tilt
depending on the condition of the
NOTICE sunroof.
The sunroof is made to slide 3. Release the control lever when the
together with the sunshade. Do sunroof stops moving.
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.

3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle

5. Within 3 seconds, push and hold i Information


the control lever forward until the
sunroof operates as follows: • If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide discharged, or the sunroof fuse is
Close. blown, the sunroof may not operate
normally.
Do not release the lever until the • For more detailed information, we
operation is completed. recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, start the procedure again from
step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control lever


after all steps have completed. (The
sunroof system has been reset.)

3-50
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Hood
Opening the hood

Convenient features of your vehicle


OAD045026 OAD045039L
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise 4. Pull out the support rod and hold
OAD045025
the hood slightly, push up the sec- the hood open with the support
ondary latch (1) inside of the hood rod (3).
1. Park the vehicle and set the park- center and lift the hood (2).
ing brake.
WARNING
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop • Grasp the support rod in the
open slightly. area wrapped in rubber. The
rubber will help prevent you
from being burned by hot metal
when the engine is hot.
• The support rod must be insert-
ed completely into the hole pro-
vided whenever you inspect the
engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling
and possibly injuring you.

3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle

Closing the hood Trunk


WARNING
1. Before closing the hood, check the Opening the trunk
following: • Before closing the hood, ■ Outside
• All filler caps in engine compart- ensure all obstructions are
ment must be correctly installed. removed from around hood
• Gloves, rags or any other com- opening.
bustible material must be removed • Always double check to be
from the engine compartment. sure that the hood is firmly
2. Lower the hood halfway and push latched before driving away. If
down to securely lock in place. it is not latched, the hood
Then double check to be sure the could open while the vehicle
hood is secure. is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident. OAD045027L
• Do not move the vehicle with 1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
the hood in the raised posi- (Park).
tion, as vision is obstructed, 2. Then do one of the following :
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall - Press the button on the trunk
or be damaged. itself with the Smart Key in your
possession.
- Use the mechanical key.

3-52
■ Inside Closing the trunk NOTICE
Lower the trunk lid and press down
To prevent damage to the trunk lid
until it locks.
torsion bar and the attached hard-
ware, always close the trunk
WARNING before driving.

Always keep the trunk lid com- i Information


pletely closed while the vehicle is 3
in motion. If it is left open or ajar, In cold and wet climates, trunk lock

Convenient features of your vehicle


poisonous exhaust gases con- and trunk mechanisms may not work
taining carbon monoxide (CO) properly due to freezing conditions.
OAD045028
may enter the vehicle and seri-
- Use the trunk release lever. ous illness or death may result.
3. Lift the trunk lid up.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
Power Trunk. Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.

3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle

Emergency trunk safety release (Continued)


WARNING
• Your vehicle should be kept
• You and your passengers locked and the Smart Key
must be aware of the location should be kept out of the reach
of the Emergency Trunk of children. Parents should
Safety Release lever in this teach their children about the
vehicle and how to open the dangers of playing in trunks.
trunk in case you are acciden- • Use the release lever for
tally locked in the trunk. emergencies only.
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is par-
OAD045029 tially or totally latched and the
Your vehicle is equipped with an person is unable to get out,
Emergency Trunk Safety Release serious injury or death could
lever located inside the trunk. When occur due to lack of ventila-
someone is inadvertently locked in tion, exhaust fumes and rapid
the trunk, the trunk can be opened by heat build-up, or because of
moving the lever in the direction of the exposure to cold weather con-
arrow and pushing the trunk open. ditions. The trunk is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle’s crush zone.
(Continued)

3-54
Smart Trunk (if equipped) How to use the Smart Trunk 1. Setting
The trunk can be opened with no- To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
touch activation satisfying all the User Settings Mode and select
conditions below. Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this chap-
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
ter. 3

Convenient features of your vehicle


i Information
• The Smart Trunk does not operate
OAD045030 when:
- The smart key is detected within
On a vehicle equipped with a smart 15 seconds after the doors are
key, the trunk can be opened using closed and locked, and is continu-
the Smart Trunk system. ously detected.
- The smart key is detected within 15
seconds after the doors are closed
and locked, and within 60 inches
(1.5 m) from the front door han-
dles. (for vehicles equipped with
Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.

3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING
• Make sure you close the trunk
before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk
do not come out when open-
OAD045031 OAD045032 ing the trunk on a slope. It
2. Detect and Alert 3. Automatic opening may cause serious injury.
If you are positioned in the detecting The hazard warning lights will blink • Make sure to deactivate the
area (20~40 inches (50 ~100 cm) and chime will sound 2 times and Smart Trunk when washing
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart then the trunk will open. your vehicle. Otherwise, the
key, the hazard warning lights will blink trunk may open inadvertently.
and chime will sound for about 3 sec- • The key should be kept out of
onds to alert you the smart key has reach of children. Children
been detected and the trunk will open. may inadvertently open the
Smart Trunk while playing
i Information around the rear area of the
Do not approach the detecting area if vehicle.
you do not want the trunk to open. If
you have unintentionally entered the
detecting area and the hazard warn-
ing lights and chime starts to operate,
leave the detecting area with the
smart key. The trunk will stay closed.

3-56
How to deactivate the Smart i Information Detecting area
Trunk function using the smart
key • If you press the door unlock button
(2), the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated temporarily. But, if
you do not open any door for 30 sec-
onds, the smart trunk function will
be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
3
(3) for more than 1 second, the

Convenient features of your vehicle


trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button (1)
or trunk open button (3) when the
OAD045033
Smart Trunk function is not in the
Detect and Alert stage, the smart • The Smart Trunk operates with a
OLF044006 trunk function will not be deactivated. welcome alert if the smart key is
1. Door lock • In case you have deactivated the detected within 20~40 inches
2. Door unlock Smart Trunk function by pressing (50~100 cm) from the trunk.
3. Trunk open the smart key button and opened a • The alert stops at once if the smart
door, the smart trunk function can key is positioned outside the
4. Panic be activated again by closing and detecting area during the Detect
If you press any button of the smart locking all doors. and Alert stage.
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.

3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle

i Information Fuel Filler Door


• The Smart Trunk function will not Opening the fuel filler door
work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone. OAD045035
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being 3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
operated close to your vehicle. OAD045034
fully open.
• The detecting range may decrease 4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
or increase when : The fuel filler door must be opened turn it counterclockwise. You may
- One side of the tire is raised to from inside the vehicle by pulling up hear a hissing noise as the pres-
replace a tire or to inspect the vehi- the fuel filler door release lever. sure inside the tank equalizes.
cle. 1. Turn the engine off. Locate the fuel 5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope or filler door release lever on the floor
unpaved road, etc. on the left side of the driver seat. i Information
2. Pull up on the release lever. If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
3-58
Closing the fuel filler door (Continued)
WARNING
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
Gasoline is highly flammable once you have begun refuel-
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is and explosive. Failure to follow ing. You can generate a build-
latched securely. these guidelines may result in up of static electricity by
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: touching, rubbing or sliding
• Read and follow all warnings against any item or fabric
posted at the gas station. capable of producing static 3
• Before refueling, note the electricity. Static electricity

Convenient features of your vehicle


location of the Emergency discharge can ignite fuel
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, vapors causing a fire. If you
at the gas station. must re-enter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
• Before touching the fuel noz- potentially dangerous static
zle, you should eliminate the electricity discharge by touch-
potential build-up of static ing a metal part of the vehicle,
electricity by touching a metal away from the fuel filler neck,
part of the vehicle, a safe dis- nozzle or other gasoline
tance away from the fuel filler source, with your bare hand.
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand. • When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
• Do not use cellular phones sure to place the container on
while refueling. Electric cur- the ground prior to refueling.
rent and/or electronic interfer- Static electricity discharge
ence from cellular phones can from the container can ignite
potentially ignite fuel vapors fuel vapors causing a fire.
and cause a fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)

3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle

(Continued) (Continued) i Information


Once refueling has begun, • If a fire breaks out during refu- Make sure to refuel your vehicle
contact between your bare eling, leave the vicinity of the according to the "Fuel Requirements"
hand and the vehicle should vehicle, and immediately con- suggested in the Introduction chapter.
be maintained until the filling tact the manager of the gas
is complete. station and then contact the NOTICE
• Use only approved portable local fire department. Follow
plastic fuel containers designed any safety instructions they • Do not spill fuel on the exterior
to carry and store gasoline. provide. surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, of fuel spilled on painted sur-
• When refueling, always move faces may damage the paint.
the shift lever to the P (Park) it can cover your clothes or
position, set the parking skin and thus subject you to • If the fuel filler cap requires
brake, and place the ignition the risk of fire and burns. replacement, use only a genuine
switch to the LOCK/OFF posi- Always remove the fuel cap HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
tion. Sparks produced by carefully and slowly. If the cap specified for your vehicle. An
electrical components related is venting fuel or if you hear a incorrect fuel filler cap can
to the engine can ignite fuel hissing sound, wait until the result in a serious malfunction
vapors causing a fire. condition stops before com- of the fuel system or emission
pletely removing the cap. control system.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or • Always check that the fuel cap
leave a lit cigarette in your is installed securely to pre-
vehicle while at a gas station, vent fuel spillage in the event
especially during refueling. of an accident.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
(Continued)

3-60
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Conventional cluster

3
1. Tachometer

Convenient features of your vehicle


2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

The actual cluster in the vehicle may


differ from the illustration.

OADA046100

3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle

■ Supervision cluster (Type A)

1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
■ Supervision cluster (Type B)
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

The actual cluster in the vehicle may


differ from the illustration.

OADA046101/OADA046102

3-62
Instrument Cluster Control ■ Conventional cluster Gauges
Adjusting instrument cluster Speedometer
illumination

Convenient features of your vehicle


OAD045115
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
(Type A) (Type B)

OADA045103
OAD045108N The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
headlights are on, press the illumina- meters per hour (km/h).
tion control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination. OTL045150L/OTL045151L
When pressing the illumination con- • The brightness of the instrument
trol button, the interior switch illumi- panel illumination is displayed.
nation intensity is also adjusted. • If the brightness reaches the maxi-
mum or minimum level, a chime
will sound.

3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle

Tachometer Engine coolant temperature NOTICE


Gauge
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the "H" position, it indi-
cates overheating that may dam-
age the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.

OAD045105 WARNING
The tachometer indicates the OAD045106
Never remove the radiator cap or
approximate number of engine revo- This gauge indicates the tempera- reservoir cap when the engine is
lutions per minute (rpm). ture of the engine coolant when the hot. The engine coolant is under
Use the tachometer to select the cor- ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop pressure and could severely
rect shift points and to prevent lug- button is ON. burn. Wait until the engine is cool
ging and/or over-revving the engine. before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
NOTICE
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.

3-64
Fuel Gauge Odometer
WARNING
■ Conventional cluster

Running out of fuel can expose


vehicle occupants to danger.You
must stop and obtain additional
fuel as soon as possible after
the warning light comes on or
when the gauge indicator comes 3
close to the "E (Empty)" level.

Convenient features of your vehicle


NOTICE OAD045119N
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OADA045107 Avoid driving with an extremely (Type A) (Type B)
This gauge indicates the approxi- low fuel level. Running out of fuel
mate amount of fuel remaining in the could cause the engine to misfire,
fuel tank. damaging the catalytic converter.

i Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
OTLE045140/OTLE045141
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is The odometer indicates the total dis-
nearly empty. tance that the vehicle has been driv-
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge en and should be used to determine
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel when periodic maintenance should
warning light may come on earlier be performed.
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle

Outside temperature gauge ■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster


(Type A) (Type B)
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer (to avoid
distracting the driver).
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F: OAD045116N OTLA045130/OTLA045131
- Press the TRIP button for more than - Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other
5 seconds on the steering wheel. Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system)

Both the temperature unit on the


cluster LCD display and climate con-
trol screen will change.

3-66
Transmission shift indicator For example ■ Conventional cluster

■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster : Indicates that shifting up to the


(Type A) (Type B) 3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, 3
or 6th gear).

Convenient features of your vehicle


When the system is not working prop- OAD045185N
erly, the indicator is not displayed. ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
(Type A) (Type B)

OAD045117/OTLE045134

Manual transmission shift indicator


(if equipped)
This indicator informs which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5
OTL045132/OTL045133

Automatic transmission shift indi-


cator (If equipped)
This indicator displays which automatic
transmission shift lever is selected.
• Park : P • Reverse : R
• Neutral : N • Drive : D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle

■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster Icy road warning light When the temperature on the out-
(Type A) (Type B) side temperature gauge is approxi-
■ Conventional cluster
mately below 40°F (4°C), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks 5 times,
and then illuminates. Also, the warn-
ing chime sounds 1 time.

i Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
OTL045134/OTL045135 OAD045186N attentively and safely refraining from
Shift indicator pop-up ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
(Type A) (Type B)
over-speeding, rapid acceleration,
(if equipped) sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
The pop-up displays the current gear
position selected for 2 seconds
(P/R/N/D).

OAD055094L/OAD055095L

This warning light is to warn the driv-


er the road may be icy.

3-68
Warning and Indicator lights Supplemental Restraint Seat Belt Warning Light
System Warning Light
i Information
Make sure that all warning lights are This warning light illuminates:
OFF after starting the engine. If any This warning light informs the driver
light is still ON, this indicates a situa- • Once you set the ignition switch or that the seat belt is not fastened.
tion that needs attention. the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position. For more information, refer to the 3
- It illuminates for approximately 6 "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

Convenient features of your vehicle


seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake If the brake fluid level in the reser- Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
Fluid Warning Light voir is low: short a distance with only a portion
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe of the brake system working.
location and stop your vehicle. If the brakes fail while you are driv-
This warning light illuminates: 2. With the engine stopped, check the ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
brake fluid level immediately and al engine braking and stop the vehi-
• Once you set the ignition switch or cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
the Engine Start/Stop button to the add fluid as required (For more
ON position. information, refer to "Brake
Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding WARNING
- It illuminates for approximately 3 brake fluid, check all brake compo-
seconds. nents for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
- It remains on if the parking brake leak is found, or if the warning light Warning Light
is applied. remains on, or if the brakes do not
• When the parking brake is applied. operate properly, do not drive the Driving the vehicle with a warn-
vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected ing light ON is dangerous. If the
• When the brake fluid level in the
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
reservoir is low.
Warning Light illuminates with
- If the warning light illuminates the parking brake released, it
with the parking brake released, it Dual-diagonal braking system indicates that the brake fluid
indicates the brake fluid level in Your vehicle is equipped with dual- level is low.
reservoir is low. diagonal braking systems. This In this case, have your vehicle
means you still have braking on two inspected by an authorized
wheels even if one of the dual sys- HYUNDAI dealer.
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure is
required to stop the vehicle.

3-70
Anti-lock Brake System Electronic i Information - Electronic
(ABS) Warning Light Brake force Brake force Distribution (EBD)
Distribution System Warning Light
(EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
This warning light illuminates: These two warning lights illuminate both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
• Once you set the ignition switch or at the same time while driving: Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
the Engine Start/Stop button to the When the ABS and regular brake sys- speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
ON position. may not work. Also, the EPS Warning 3
tem may not work normally.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 Light may illuminate and the steering
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

Convenient features of your vehicle


seconds and then goes off. effort may increase or decrease.
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When there is a malfunction with In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
the ABS (The normal braking sys- WARNING ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock Electronic Brake force
brake system). Distribution (EBD) System
In this case, have your vehicle Warning Light
inspected by an authorized When both ABS and Parking
HYUNDAI dealer. Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle

Electronic Power Malfunction Indicator NOTICE


Steering (EPS) Lamp (MIL)
Warning Light - Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause
This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates: damage to the emission control
• Once you turn the ignition switch or • Once you turn the ignition switch or systems which could affect dri-
the Engine Start/Stop button to the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON vability and/or fuel economy.
ON position. position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 - It illuminates for approximately 3 NOTICE
seconds and then goes off. seconds and then goes off.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
• When there is a malfunction with • When there is a malfunction with (MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-
the EPS. the emission control system. ic converter damage is possible
In this case, have your vehicle In this case, have your vehicle which could result in loss of
inspected by an authorized inspected by an authorized engine power.
HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealer. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-72
Charging System Engine Oil Pressure NOTICE
Warning Light Warning Light
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil and restarting the
engine or if oil is not available,
If this warning light comes on while This warning light illuminates: turn off the engine. There is a
the engine is running, the battery is • Once you turn the ignition switch or mechanical concern that needs to
not being charged. Immediately turn the Engine Start/Stop button to the be repaired before you can contin-
off all electrical accessories. Try not ON position. ue driving. In this case, have your 3
to use electrically operated controls, vehicle inspected by an author-
- It remains on until the engine is

Convenient features of your vehicle


such as the power windows. Keep the ized HYUNDAI dealer.
engine running; stopping then restart- started.
ing the engine will quickly discharge • When the engine oil pressure is low.
NOTICE
the battery.
If the engine oil pressure is low: - Engine Oil Pressure Warning light
If there is a malfunction with either 1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe To prevent severe engine damage,
the alternator or electrical charging location and stop your vehicle. after the Engine Oil Pressure
system: Warning Light is illuminated and as
2.Turn the engine off and check the soon as it is safe to do so, turn the
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe engine oil level (For more infor- engine off and check the oil level.
location and stop your vehicle. mation, refer to "Engine Oil" in
chapter 7). If the level is low, add If the oil level is low, fill the engine
2.Turn the engine off and check the oil to the proper level and start the
alternator drive belt for looseness oil as required.
engine again. If the light stays on
or breakage. with the engine running, turn the
If the belt is adjusted properly, engine off immediately.
there may be a problem in the elec- In this case, have your vehicle
trical charging system. inspected by an authorized
In this case, have your vehicle HYUNDAI dealer.
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle

Low Fuel Level Low Tire Pressure This warning light remains ON
Warning Light Warning Light after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates: When there is a malfunction with the
TPMS.
When the fuel tank is nearly empty. • Once you turn the ignition switch or
Add fuel as soon as possible. the Engine Start/Stop button to the In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ON position. ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE - It illuminates for approximately 3 For more information, refer to
seconds and then goes off. "Tire Pressure Monitoring System
- Low Fuel Level
• When one or more of your tires are (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Driving with the Low Fuel Level significantly underinflated (The
warning light on or with the fuel location of each underinflated tire
level below "E" can cause the is displayed on the supervision WARNING
engine to misfire and damage the cluster LCD display).
catalytic converter. Safe Stopping
For more information, refer to • The TPMS cannot alert you to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System severe and sudden tire damage
(TPMS)" in chapter 6. caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.

3-74
Automatic Emergency Headlight Warning Adaptive Front Lighting
Braking (AEB) Warning Light System (AFLS) Warning AFLS
light Light (if equipped)
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates : This warning light illuminates: This warning light blinks:
• When the AEB system is turned off. This warning light illuminates if one • Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
• When the radar sensor or cover is of the exterior bulbs (headlamp, tail- Button to the ON position.
blocked with dirt or snow. Check lamp, foglamp, etc.) is not operating - It illuminates for approximately 3
3
the sensor and cover and clean properly. One of the bulbs may need seconds and then goes off.

Convenient features of your vehicle


them by using a soft cloth. to be replaced. If the vehicle is
equipped with LED headlamps, have • When there is a malfunction with
• When there is a malfunction with the vehicle inspected by an author- the AFLS.
AEB. In this case, have your vehi- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
cle inspected by an authorized If there is a malfunction with the
HYUNDAI dealer. AFLS:
i Information
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
When replacing the bulb, use the same location and stop your vehicle.
wattage bulb.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
For more information, refer to engine. If the warning light remains
"BULB WATTAGE" in chapter 8. on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle

Master Warning Light Door Ajar Warning Light Electronic Stability


(for conventional Control (ESC) Indicator
cluster) Light

This indicator light illuminates This warning light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or • When a door is not closed securely. • Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position. ON position.
Trunk Open Warning
- It illuminates for approximately 3 Light (for conventional - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. cluster) seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction in • When there is a malfunction with
operation in any of the following the ESC system.
systems: This warning light illuminates:
In this case, have your vehicle
- Exterior lamp malfunction • When the trunk is not closed inspected by an authorized
securely. HYUNDAI dealer.
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Lane Keeping Assist System This indicator light blinks:
(LKAS) malfunction (if equipped) While the ESC is operating.
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) For more information, refer to
- Service reminder "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
To identify the details of the warning, in chapter 5.
look at the LCD display.

3-76
Electronic Stability Immobilizer Indicator This indicator light illuminates for
Control (ESC) OFF Light (with smart key) 2 seconds and goes off:
Indicator Light (if equipped) If the smart key is in the vehicle and
the Engine Start/Stop button is ON,
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates for but the vehicle cannot detect the
smart key.
• Once you turn the ignition switch or up to 30 seconds:
the Engine Start/Stop button to the In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
When the vehicle detects the smart 3
ON position. ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
key in the vehicle with the Engine
- It illuminates for approximately 3 Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON

Convenient features of your vehicle


seconds and then goes off. position. This indicator light blinks:
• When you deactivate the ESC sys- - At this time, you can start the • When the battery voltage of the
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but- engine. smart key is low.
ton. - The indicator light goes off after - At this time, you can not start the
starting the engine. engine. However, you can start the
For more information, refer to engine if you press the ignition
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" switch or the Engine Start/Stop but-
in chapter 5.
This indicator light blinks for a few
ton with the smart key. (For more
seconds:
information, refer to "Starting
When the smart key is not in the the Engine" in chapter 5).
vehicle.
• When there is a malfunction with
- At this time, you cannot start the the immobilizer system.
engine.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn Signal Indicator High Beam Indicator Smart High Beam indi-
Light Light cator (if equipped)

This indicator light blinks: This indicator light illuminates: This warning light illuminates :
When you operate the turn signal • When the headlights are on and in • When the high-Beam is on with the
indicator. the high beam position. light switch in the AUTO light posi-
• When the turn signal lever is pulled tion.
If any of the following occurs, there into the Flash-to-Pass position. • If your vehicle detects oncoming or
may be a malfunction with the turn preceding vehicles, the Smart High
signal system. Beam system will switch the high
Light ON Indicator beam to low beam automatically.
- The turn signal indicator light illu- Light
minates but does not blink
For more information, refer to
- The turn signal indicator light "Smart High Beam" in this chapter.
blinks rapidly
This indicator light illuminates:
- The turn signal indicator light
When the tail lights or headlights are
does not illuminate at all
on.
If either of these conditions occur,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-78
Cruise Indicator Light SPORT Mode Indicator Lane Keeping Assist
(for conventional Light System (LKAS)
cluster, if equipped) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control system is When you select "SPORT" mode as • [Green] When you activate the lane
enabled. drive mode. departure warning system by
pressing the LKAS button. 3
For more information, refer to For more information, refer to • [White] When system operating

Convenient features of your vehicle


"Cruise Control System" in chap- "Drive Mode Integrated Control conditions are not satisfied or
ter 5. System" in chapter 5. when the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
Cruise SET Indicator ECO Mode Indicator • [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
Light (for conventional Light tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
cluster, if equipped)
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates : dealer.
When the cruise control speed is set. When you select "ECO" mode as
drive mode. For more information, refer to “Lane
For more information, refer to Keeping Assist System (LKAS)” in
"Cruise Control System" in chap- For more information, refer to chapter 5.
ter 5. "Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" in this chapter.

3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD Display Messages Shift to "P" Press START button again


(if equipped) ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
■ Supervision cluster

OTL045144L OTL045145L

This message is displayed if you try This message is displayed if you


OTL045146L to turn off the engine without the shift were unable to start the vehicle when
This warning message is displayed if lever in P (Park) position. the Start/Stop button was pressed.
you try to start the engine with the At this time, the Engine Start/Stop If this occurs, attempt to start the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N button turns to the ACC position (If engine by pressing the Start/Stop
(Neutral) position. you press the Engine Start/Stop but- button again.
ton once more, it will turn to the ON If the warning message appears
i Information position). each time you press the Start/Stop
You can start the engine with the shift button, have your vehicle inspected
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.

3-80
Press brake pedal to start engine Press START button with key Low Key Battery
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster

Convenient features of your vehicle


OTL045142L OTL045140L OTL045141L

This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button you press the Engine Start/Stop but- the battery of the smart key is dis-
changes to the ACC position twice by ton while the warning message "Key charged when the Engine Start/Stop
pressing the button repeatedly with- not detected" is shown. button changes to the OFF position.
out depressing the brake pedal. At this time, the immobilizer indicator
In order to start the vehicle, press the light blinks.
brake pedal to start the engine.

3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle

Key not detected Key not in vehicle Align Steering Wheel


■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster

OTL045139L OTL045138L OTL045156L/OTL045157L

This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when the smart key is not in the vehicle you start the engine when the steer-
you press the Engine Start/Stop but- when you press the Engine ing wheel is turned to more than 90
ton. Start/Stop button. degrees to the left or right.
When attempting to start the vehicle, In order to align the steering wheel,
always have the smart key with you. turn the wheel in the direction shown
while the engine is running to
straighten the steering wheel.

3-82
Steering wheel aligning is com- Door / Hood / Trunk open Sunroof open
pleted ■ Supervision cluster ■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster

Convenient features of your vehicle


OAD045135/OAD045136 OAD045160/OAD045137
OTL045158L This warning message is displayed This warning message is displayed
If the steering wheel aligning is com- indicating which door, or the hood, or if you turn off the engine when the
pleted after "Align steering wheel" the trunk is open. sunroof is open.
warning message is displayed, this If the door/hood/trunk open warning
message is displayed for 2 seconds. message is blocked with another
warning message, an icon will appear
on the top of the LCD display.

3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse Turn on "FUSE SWITCH" Low Pressure


■ Supervision cluster ■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
(Type A) (Type B)

OTL045147L OAD045144/OTL045155L OAD045121N/OAD065023N

This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnect- the fuse switch under the steering the tire pressure is low. The corre-
ed. wheel is OFF. sponding tire on the vehicle will be
If this message is displayed, replace If this message is displayed, turn the illuminated.
the fuse with a new one before start- fuse switch on.
ing the vehicle. If that is not possible, For more information, refer to
you can start the engine by pressing For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System
the Engine Start/Stop button for 10 "Fuses" in chapter 7. (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
seconds in the ACC position.

3-84
Low Fuel Engine has overheated Check headlight
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
(Type A) (Type B) (Type A) (Type B)

Convenient features of your vehicle


OTL045160L OAD045125L/OAD045126L OAD045141L/OAD045142L

This warning message is displayed if This warning message is displayed This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel. when the engine coolant tempera- the headlamps are not operating
When this message is displayed, the ture is above 248°F (120°C). This properly. The headlamp bulb may
vehicle range is approximately 30 means that the engine is overheated need to be replaced.
miles. and may be damaged.
When this message is displayed, the NOTICE
low fuel level warning light in the If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6. When replacing the bulb, use the
cluster will come on. same wattage bulb.
It is recommended to look for the For more information, refer to
nearest fueling station and refuel as "BULB WATTAGE" in chapter 8.
soon as possible.

3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle

Lights Mode Wiper Check AEB system


(if equipped)
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster

OAD045128N OAD045129L

This indicator displays which exterior This indicator displays which wiper OLF056473N
light is selected using the lighting speed is selected using the wiper This warning message is displayed if
control. control. there is a problem with the Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) system.
In some cases, the AEB sensor or the
cover located in the lower front grille
may be dirty or obscured with dirt or
snow. Check the sensor and cover
and clean them by using a soft cloth.
If the warning message persists, have
your vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to
"Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) System" in chapter 5.

3-86
CRUISE/SET indicator
(if equipped)
■ Supervision cluster

Convenient features of your vehicle


OAD055096L/OAD055097L
The indicator is displayed when the
cruise control system is enabled and
the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to "Cruise


Control System" in chapter 5.

3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD DISPLAY (FOR SUPERVISION CLUSTER)


LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
■ Ty p e A (2) ▲, ▼ : MOVE switch for chang-
ing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item

■ Ty p e B

OAD045109N

3-88
LCD Modes
Modes Symbol Description
This mode displays information related to driving such as tripmeter, fuel
Trip Computer economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT)


This mode displays the state of the navigation.
3
(if equipped)

Convenient features of your vehicle


This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane
SCC/LKAS Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
(If equipped) For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)“ and Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS) in chapter 5.

A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

or or This mode displays information such as tire pressure, service intervals,


Information
warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle

Edit, settings after engaging Trip computer mode Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
parking brake ■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Manual transmission ■ Automatic transmission

OTLA045187/OTLA045188 OLF044172/OLF044173
OAD045161L/OAD045162L The trip computer mode displays This mode displays the state of the
This warning message appears if information related to vehicle driving navigation.
you try to adjust the User Settings parameters including range, fuel
while driving. economy, trip meter information and
vehicle speed.
Quick guide help For more information, refer to
Press and hold the OK button in the "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
User Settings Mode, the explanation
about the selected item is displayed.

3-90
SCC/LKAS mode (if equipped) A/V mode Information mode
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B

Convenient features of your vehicle


OAD055080N OLF044175/OLF044176 OTLA045181/OTLA045182

This mode displays the state of the This mode displays the state of the Service interval
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and A/V system. Service in
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
For more information, refer to days, "Service in" message is dis-
"Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and played for several seconds each time
"Lane Keeping Assist System you set the ignition switch or Engine
(LKAS)" in chapter 5. Start/Stop button to the ON position.

For the setting of the service inter-


val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.

3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle

■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B Warning message


If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
information mode for several seconds.
- Malfunction of below systems
• Exterior lamp malfunction
• Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
• Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS) malfunction (if equipped)
OTLA045296/OTLA045297 OLF044457N/OLF044456N • Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Service required Service in OFF • Service reminder and so on.
If you exceed the specified service If the service interval is not set,
interval, a message indicating, "Service in OFF" message is dis-
"Service required" will be displayed played.
each time you turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval, press the i Information
OK button for more than 1 second.
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.

3-92
User Settings Mode
In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Driving Assist
Items Explanation
To adjust the sensitivity (Lane Departure Warning / Standard LKA / Active LKA) of the Lane
LKAS 3
Keeping Assist System.
(Lane Keeping Assist
System, if equipped)

Convenient features of your vehicle


For more information, refer to the "Lane Keep Assist System" in chapter 5.

To adjust the sensitivity (Slow/Normal/Fast) of the Smart Cruise Control system.


SCC
(Smart Cruise Control)
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" in chapter 5.

AEB To activate or deactivate the AEB system.


(Automatic Emergency
Braking, if equipped) For more details, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.

To adjust the initial warning alert time for the Forward Collision Warning / Automatic Emergency
FCW
Braking system. The option settings are Late, Normal, or Early.
(Forward Collision Warning,
if equipped)
For more information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
RCTA To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert,
if equipped) For more information, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.

3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle

Door / Trunk
Items Explanation
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph
(15km/h).
Auto Lock
• Enable on Shift : All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shift-
ed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.


• On Key Out or Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is
Auto Unlock
set to the OFF position.
• On Shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.

• Off : The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
unlock button is pressed.
Two Press Unlock
• On : Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock
button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.
Smart Trunk • Off : The Smart Trunk function will be deactivated.
(if equipped) • On : The Smart Trunk function will be activated

3-94
Light
Items Explanation
• Off : The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
One Touch Turn Signal moved slightly.

For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter. 3


• On : The headlamp delay function will be activated.

Convenient features of your vehicle


• Off : The headlamp delay function will be deactivated.
Headlamp Delay
For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.
• On : The welcome light function will be activated.
Welcome Light • Off : The welcome light function will be deactivated.
(if equipped)
For more information, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.

Sound
Items Explanation
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) • Off : The BSD sound function will be deactivated.
Sound (if equipped) • On : The BSD sound function will be activated.
Welcome Sound • Off : The welcome sound function will be deactivated.
(if equipped) • On : The welcome sound function will be activated.

3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle

Convenience
Items Explanation
• None: The seat easy access function is deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal)
Seat Easy Access or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more information, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.
If this item is checked, the message "Align Steering Wheel" will be displayed on the LCD if the
Steering Position
steering wheel has been turned to the left or right over 90 degrees when the engine is turned ON.

Wiper/Lights Display If this item is checked, LCD display shows a selected wiper/light mode whenever you changed its mode.

Gear Position Pop-up


If this item is checked, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD when you move the shift lever.
(if equipped)

Service interval
Items Explanation
In this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
Service Interval
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).

3-96
Other features
Items Explanation

• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving.
Fuel Economy Auto Reset • After Refueling : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
3
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Convenient features of your vehicle


Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)

3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle

TRIP COMPUTER
Conventional Cluster Trip modes
The trip computer is a microcomput- FUEL ECONOMY
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related • Range
to driving. • Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
i Information
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example TRIP A
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected. • Tripmeter [A] OAD045450N
• Elapsed Time [A] To change the trip mode, press the
• Average Vehicle Speed [A] TRIP button on the steering wheel.

TRIP B
• Tripmeter [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

Service Information

Digital Speed ON/OFF

3-98
Range i Information Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
lated by the total driving distance
or the battery power has been inter-
and fuel consumption since the last
rupted, the range function may not
average fuel economy reset.
operate correctly.
- Fuel economy range:
• The range may differ from the actu-
0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or km/L
al driving distance as it is an esti- 3
mate of the available driving dis- • To clear the average fuel economy
tance. manually, press the RESET button

Convenient features of your vehicle


on the steering wheel for more
• The trip computer may not register
than 1 second when the average
additional fuel if less than 1 gallon
fuel economy is displayed.
(3 liters) of fuel are added to the
OAD045151N
vehicle.
Range (1) • The fuel economy and range may Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• The range is the estimated dis- vary significantly based on driving This mode displays the instanta-
tance the vehicle can be driven conditions, driving habits, and con- neous fuel economy while driving
with the remaining fuel in the fuel dition of the vehicle. when the vehicle speed is greater
tank. than 6.2 mph [10 kph].
- Distance range: - Fuel economy range:
1 ~ 9999 mi. or 1 ~ 9999 km 0 ~ 50 MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
• If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display "----" as the range.

3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle

Trip A/B Elapsed Time (2) Average Vehicle Speed (3)


• The elapsed time is the total driv- • The average vehicle speed is cal-
ing time since the last elapsed time culated by the total driving dis-
reset. tance and driving time since the
- Time range (hh:mm): last average vehicle speed reset.
00:00 ~ 99:59 - Speed range:
• To reset the elapsed time, press the 0~160 MPH or 0~240 km/h
RESET button on the steering • To reset the average vehicle
wheel for more than 1 second when speed, press the RESET button on
the elapsed time is displayed. the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
i Information speed is displayed.
OAD045152N
The elapsed time will continue to be
Tripmeter (1) counted while the engine is still run- i Information
• The tripmeter is the total driving ning (for example, when the vehicle is • The average vehicle speed is not dis-
distance since the last tripmeter in traffic or stopped at a stop light.) played if the driving distance has
reset. been less than 0.19 miles (300
- Distance range: meters) since the ignition switch or
0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or km the Engine Start/Stop button was
turned to ON.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button on the steering • The average vehicle speed will con-
wheel for more than 1 second tinue to be calculated and will start
when the tripmeter is displayed. to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)

3-100
Service information Digital speedometer

Convenient features of your vehicle


OAD045181N

OAD045180N If you exceed the specified service OAD045177N/OAD045178N


interval, the service symbol ( )
If the remaining mileage or time will blink each time you turn ON the This message shows the speed of
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30 vehicle. the vehicle (in mph).
days, the service symbol ( ) will To turn the digital speedometer ON
blink for several seconds each time To reset the service interval, press
the RESET button for more than 5 and OFF press the RESET button for
you set the ignition switch or Engine more than 1 second when the digital
Start/Stop button to the ON position. seconds and then when the miles
and days blink press the RESET but- speedometer is displayed.
ton for more than 1 second.
i Information If the service interval is not set, the
To change or deactivate the service service symbol ( ) will not be dis-
interval, consult an authorized played.
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle

Supervision Cluster Trip modes


The trip computer is a microcomput- FUEL ECONOMY
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related • Range
to driving. • Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
i Information
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the TRIP A
battery is disconnected. • Tripmeter [A] OAD045109N

• Average Vehicle Speed [A] To change the trip mode, toggle the
• Elapsed Time [A] UP/DOWN arrow switch "▲ , ▼" on
the steering wheel.

TRIP B
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]

Digital Speedometer

3-102
Range i Information Average Fuel Economy (2)
■ Type A ■ Type B • The average fuel economy is calcu-
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
lated by the total driving distance
or the battery power has been inter-
and fuel consumption since the last
rupted, the range function may not
average fuel economy reset.
operate correctly.
- Fuel economy range:
• The range may differ from the actu-
0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or
al driving distance as it is an esti- 3
km/L
mate of the available driving dis-
tance. • The average fuel economy can be

Convenient features of your vehicle


reset both manually and automati-
• The trip computer may not register
cally.
additional fuel if less than 1 gallon
(3 liters) of fuel are added to the
OTLE045264/OTLE045265
vehicle. Manual reset
Range (1) • The fuel economy and range may To clear the average fuel economy
• The range is the estimated dis- vary significantly based on driving manually, press the OK button on the
tance the vehicle can be driven conditions, driving habits, and con- steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
with the remaining fuel in the fuel dition of the vehicle. ond when the average fuel economy
tank. is displayed.
- Distance range:
1 ~ 9999 mi. or 1 ~ 9999 km For more information on the OK
• If the estimated distance is below button, refer to the "LCD Display
1 mile (1 km), the trip computer will Control" in this chapter.
display "----" as the range.

3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic reset Instant Fuel Economy (3) Trip A/B


To reset the average fuel economy This mode displays the instanta- ■ Type A ■ Type B
automatically whenever refueling, neous fuel economy while driving
select the "After refueling" mode in when the vehicle speed is greater
User Setting menu of the LCD display than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
(Refer to "LCD Display"). - Fuel economy range:
Under "After refueling" mode, the 0 ~ 50 MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
average fuel economy will be cleared
to zero (----) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h) after refuel-
ing more than 1~2 gallons (3~6
liters).
OTLA045187/OTLA045188
i Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min- i Information
imum of 0.19 mile (0.3 km) since the If you press and hold the OK button
last ignition key cycle before the aver- when viewing the tripmeter, the
age fuel economy will be recalculated. mileage, the average vehicle speed,
and the timer will be reset simultane-
ously.

3-104
Tripmeter (1) Average Vehicle Speed (2) Elapsed Time (3)
• The tripmeter is the total driving • The average vehicle speed is cal- • The elapsed time is the total driv-
distance since the last tripmeter culated by the total driving dis- ing time since the last elapsed time
reset. tance and driving time since the reset.
- Distance range: last average vehicle speed reset. - Time range (hh:mm):
0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or km - Speed range: 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the tripmeter, press the 0~160 MPH or 0~240 km/h • To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK button on the steering wheel • To reset the average vehicle OK button on the steering wheel for 3
for more than 1 second when the speed, press the OK button on the more than 1 second when the

Convenient features of your vehicle


tripmeter is displayed. steering wheel for more than 1 elapsed time is displayed.
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed. i Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
i Information counted while the engine is still run-
• The average vehicle speed is not dis- ning (for example, when the vehicle is
played if the driving distance has in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
been less than 0.19 miles (300
meters) since the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button was
turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)

3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle

Digital speedometer Driving info display i Information


■ Type A ■ Type A ■ Type A ■ Type B If "Sunroof Open" warning message
is displayed in the cluster, the Driving
Information message may not be dis-
played.

OTLA045193/OTLA045194 OLF044418N/OLF044419N

This message shows the speed of At the end of each driving cycle, the
the vehicle (in mph). Driving Info message is displayed.
This display shows the trip distance,
the average fuel economy, and the
remaining vehicle range.
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
ignition, and then goes off automati-
cally. The information is calculated
for each ignition cycle.
If the estimated remaining vehicle
range is below 1 mile (1.6 km), the
range will display as "----" and a "Low
Fuel" warning message will be dis-
played.

3-106
LIGHT
Exterior Lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:

Convenient features of your vehicle


OLF044084N OLF044084A
Type A Type B
1. DRL (Daytime Running Lights) 1. OFF position
OFF position 2. DRL (Daytime Running Lights)
2. AUTO light position position
3. Parking lamp position 3. Parking lamp position
4. Headlamp position 4. Headlamp position

3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle

Daytime running light (DRL) NOTICE


(if equipped)
• Do not cover or spill anything on
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
the sensor (1) located in front of
can make it easier for others to see
the instrument panel.
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before • Do not clean the sensor using a
sunset. window cleaner, the cleanser may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• The DRL will be on when:
• If your vehicle has window tint
- Type A or other types of metallic coat-
The lamp switch is in the AUTO OAD045436N ing on the front windshield, the
position (2). AUTO light position (if equipped) AUTO light system may not work
properly.
The parking lamp and headlamp will
- Type B be turned ON or OFF automatically
The lamp switch is in the DRL posi- depending on the amount of light
tion (2). outside the vehicle.

• The DRL will be off when: Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
The shift lever is in P (Park) or the manually turn ON the lamps when
engine is turned off. driving at night or in a fog, driving in
the rain, or when you enter dark
areas, such as tunnels and parking
facilities.

3-108
High beam operation

Convenient features of your vehicle


OLF044086N OLF044087N
Parking lamp position ( ) Headlamp position ( ) OLF044089N
The parking lamp, license plate lamp The headlamp, parking lamp, license To turn on the high beam headlamp,
and instrument panel lamp are turned plate lamp and instrument panel lamp push the lever away from you. The
ON. are turned ON. lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
i Information when the headlamp high beams are
The ignition switch must be in the ON switched on.
position to turn on the headlamp. To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.

WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver’s vision.
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart High Beam (if equipped) Operating condition


1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The smart high beam ( ) indica-
tor will illuminate.
3. The Smart High Beam will turn on
when vehicle speed is above
25 mph (40km/h).
OLF044088N • If the lever is pushed away when
To flash the high beam headlamp, the Smart High Beam is operating,
OLF044090N
pull the lever towards you, then the Smart High Beam will turn off
release the lever. The high beams The Smart High Beam is a system and the high beam will be on con-
will remain ON as long as you hold that automatically adjusts the head- tinuously. The smart high beam
the lever towards you. lamp range (switches between high ( ) indicator will turn off.
beam and low beam) according to • If the lever is pulled towards you
the brightness of other vehicles and when the Smart High Beam is
road conditions. operating, the Smart High Beam
will turn off.
4. If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the Smart
High Beam will turn off and the low
beam will be on continuously.

3-110
The high beam switches to low beam ■ Warning message ■ Master warning
in the below conditions. CAUTION
- When the Smart High Beam is off. The system may not operate nor-
- When the light switch is not in the mally in the below conditions.
AUTO position. • When the light from the on-
- When the headlamp is detected coming or front vehicle is not
from the on-coming vehicle. detected because of lamp dam-
age, hidden from sight, etc.
3
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle. • When the lamp of the on-com-

Convenient features of your vehicle


- When the surrounding is bright ing or front vehicle is covered
enough high beams are not need- OLF054445N/OAD055026 with dust, snow or water.
ed. Warning light and message • When the light from the on-
- When streetlights or other lights When the Smart High Beam Assist coming or front vehicle is not
are detected. System is not working properly, the detected because of exhaust
- When vehicle speed is below warning message will come on for a fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.
15 mph (24 km/h). few second. After the message dis- • When the front window is cov-
appears, the master warning light will ered with foreign matters such
illuminate. Take your vehicle to an as ice, dust, fog, or is damaged.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and • When there is a similar shape
have the system checked. lamp with the front vehicle’s
lamps.
• When it is hard to see because
of fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not
repaired or replaced at an
authorized dealer.
(Continued)

3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle

(Continued)
Turn signals and lane change
WARNING signals
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted. • Do not place any accessories,
• When driving on a narrow stickers or tint on the wind-
curved road or rough road. shield.
• When driving downhill or uphill. • Have the windshield glass
replaced from an authorized
• When only part of the vehicle dealer.
in front is visible on a cross-
road or curved road. • Do not remove or impact relat-
ed parts of the Smart High
• When there is a traffic light, Beam system.
reflecting sign, flashing sign
or mirror. • Be careful that water doesn’t
get into the Smart High Beam
• When the road conditions are unit.
OLF044091N
bad such as being wet or cov- To signal a turn, push down on the
ered with snow. • Do not place objects on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
dashboard that reflects light
• When the front vehicle’s head- such as mirrors, white paper,
turn in position (A).
lamps are off but the fog lamps etc. The system may malfunc- If an indicator stays on and does not
on. tion if sunlight is reflected. flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
• When a vehicle suddenly • At times, the Smart High
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
appears from a curve. out and will require replacement.
Beam system may not work
• When the vehicle is tilted from properly, always check the
a flat tire or being towed. road conditions for your safe-
• When the LDWS (Lane ty. When the system does not
Departure Warning System) operate normally, manually
warning light illuminates. (if change between the high
equipped) beam and low beam.

3-112
Onetouch turn signal function Battery saver function Headlamp delay function
To activate the One Touch Turn The purpose of this feature is to pre- (if equipped)
Signal function, push the turn signal vent the battery from being dis- If the key is removed from the ignition
lever up or down to position (B) and charged. The system automatically switch or placed in the ACC position
then release it. turns off the parking lamp when the or the LOCK/OFF position with the
The lane change signals will blink 3, key is removed (remote key) or when headlamps ON, the headlamps
5 or 7 times. the driver turns the engine off (smart (and/or parking lamps) remain on for
You can activate or deactivate the
key) and opens the driver-side door. about 5 minutes. However, if the dri- 3
One Touch Turn Signal function or With this feature, the parking lamps ver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15

Convenient features of your vehicle


choose the number of blinking (3, 5, will turn off automatically if the driver
or 7) from the User Settings Mode parks on the side of road at night. seconds. Also, with the engine off if
(Light) on the LCD display. the driver's door is opened and
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
closed, the headlamps (and/or park-
when the engine is turned off, perform
ing lamps) are turned off after 15
For more information, refer to the the following:
seconds.
"LCD Display" section in this 1) Open the driver-side door.
chapter. The headlamps (and/or parking
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and lamps) can be turned off by pressing
ON again using the light switch on the lock button on the remote key or
the steering column. smart key twice or turning the light
switch to the OFF or AUTO position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode (Light) on the
LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.

3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting If the AFLS malfunction indicator


System) a.k.a. DBL (Dynamic comes on, the AFLS is not working
If the driver gets out of the vehicle Bending Light) (if equipped) properly. Drive to the nearest safe
through other doors (except dri- location and restart the engine. If the
ver’s door), the battery saver func- indicator continuously remains on,
tion does not operate and the we recommend that the system be
headlamp delay function does not checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
turn off automatically. Therefore, It dealer.
causes the battery to be dis-
charged. In this case, make sure
to turn off the lamp before getting
out of the vehicle.

OAD045436N

Adaptive front lighting system uses


the steering angle and vehicle
speed, to keep your field of vision
wide by swiveling and leveling the
headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling oper-
ates continuously.
3-114
Interior Lights Front lamps Front Map Lamp :
■ Type A Press either of lenses turn the map
WARNING lamp on or off. This light produces a
spot beam for convenient use as a
Do not use the interior lights map lamp at night or as a personal
when driving in the dark.The inte- lamp for the driver and the front pas-
rior lights may obscure your view senger.
and cause an accident. 3
Front Door Lamp ( ):

Convenient features of your vehicle


NOTICE The front or rear room lamps come on
OAD045405
when the front or rear doors are
Do not use the interior lights for opened if the engine is running or not.
■ Type B
extended periods when the engine When doors are unlocked by the
is turned off or the battery will dis- remote key or smart key, the front and
charge. rear lamps come on for approximate-
ly 30 seconds as long as any door is
Interior lamp AUTO cut not opened. The front and rear room
lamps go out gradually after approxi-
The interior lamps will automatically mately 30 seconds if the door is
go off approximately 20 minutes after closed. However, if the ignition switch
the engine is turned off and the is in the ON position or all doors are
doors closed. If a door is opened, the locked, the front and rear lamps will
lamp will go off 40 minutes after the OAD045406
turn off. If a door is opened with the
engine is turned off. If the doors are (1) Front Map Lamp ignition switch in the ACC position or
locked by the remote key or smart (2) Front Door Lamp the OFF position, the front and rear
key and the vehicle enters the armed lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.
stage of the theft alarm system, the (3) Front Room Lamp ON
lamps will go off five seconds later. (4) Front Room Lamp OFF

3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle

Front room lamp Rear lamp Trunk room lamp


• :
Press the button to turn ON the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
Re-press the button to turn OFF
the room lamp.

• :
Press the button to turn OFF the
room lamp for the front/rear seats
regardless of front or rear door open
position. OAD045407 OAD045408

Rear Room Lamp ( ): The trunk room lamp comes on


Press this switch to turn the room when the trunk is opened.
lamp on and off.
NOTICE
The trunk lamp comes on as long
as the trunk lid is open. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk.

3-116
Vanity mirror lamp Welcome System (if equipped) Headlamp and Parking lamp
Welcome light When the headlamp (with the lamp
switch in the headlamp or AUTO
position) is on and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
parking lamp and headlamp will
come on for 15 seconds if/or any of
the below is performed. 3
• When the door unlock button is

Convenient features of your vehicle


pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
OAD045410 or unlock button on the remote key or
OAD045434L smart key the parking lamp and
Flip the switch to turn on and off the
headlamp will turn off immediately.
vanity mirror light Door handle lamp (if equipped)
You can activate or deactivate the
When all the doors (and trunk) are Welcome Light from the User Settings
closed and locked, the door handle Mode (Light) on the LCD display.
lamp will come on for about 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
For more information, refer to the
• When the door unlock button is "LCD Display" section in this chap-
pressed on the remote key or ter.
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.

3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the room lamp will turn off
immediately.

3-118
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers i Information
Operates as follows when the igni- If there is heavy accumulation of snow
tion switch is in the ON position. or ice on the windshield, defrost the
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, windshield for about 10 minutes, or
push the lever upward and until the snow and/or ice is removed
release. The wipers will oper- before using the windshield wipers to
ate continuously if the lever is ensure proper operation.
held in this position. If you do not remove the snow and/or
3
OFF : Wiper is not in operation. ice before using the wiper and washer,

Convenient features of your vehicle


INT : Wiper operates intermittently at it may damage the wiper and washer
OLF044278 the same wiping intervals. To system.
A : Wiper speed control vary the speed setting, move
the speed control lever. The top
· MIST – Single wipe most setting will run the wipers
· OFF – Off most frequently (for more rain).
· INT – Intermittent wipe The bottom setting will run the
· LO – Low wiper speed wipers the least frequently (for
less rain).
· HI – High wiper speed
LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.
HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle

Windshield Washers NOTICE


WARNING
• To prevent possible damage to
When the outside temperature is the washer pump, do not oper-
below freezing, ALWAYS warm ate the washer when the fluid
the windshield using the reservoir is empty.
defroster to prevent the washer • To prevent possible damage to
fluid from freezing on the wind- the wipers or windshield, do not
shield and obscuring your vision operate the wipers when the
which could result in an acci- windshield is dry.
dent and serious injury or death.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
OLF044095N
manually.
In the OFF position, pull the lever • To prevent possible damage to
gently toward you to spray washer the wipers and washer system,
fluid on the windshield and to run the use anti-freezing washer fluids
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and in the winter season or cold
wiper operation will continue until you weather.
release the lever. If the washer does
not work, you may need to add wash-
er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

3-120
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM
Rear View Camera This is a supplemental system that
provides a view of the area behind WARNING
the vehicle through the A/V display
while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) • Never rely solely on the Rear
position. View Camera when backing-
up.
• ALWAYS look around your
WARNING vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
3
The Rear View Camera is not a moving the vehicle in any

Convenient features of your vehicle


safety device. It only serves to direction to prevent a collision.
assist the driver in identifying
OAD045114N objects directly behind the mid- • Always pay close attention
dle of the vehicle. The camera when the vehicle is driven
does NOT cover the complete close to objects, particularly
area behind the vehicle. pedestrians, and especially
children.

NOTICE
Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not work
normally if the lens is covered
OAD045113N with dirt or snow.
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.

3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle

DEFROSTER
NOTICE Rear Window Defroster • To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
To prevent damage to the conduc- ■ Manual climate control system
defroster button located in the center
tors bonded to the inside surface facia switch panel. The indicator on
of the rear window, never use the rear window defroster button illu-
sharp instruments or window minates when the defroster is ON.
cleaners containing abrasives to • To turn off the defroster, press the
clean the window. rear window defroster button again.
If you want to defrost and defog
the front windshield, refer to the i Information
"Windshield Defrosting and • If there is heavy accumulation of
OAD045323
Defogging" section in this chapter. ■ Automatic climate control system snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automat-
ically turns off after approximately
20 minutes or when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.

Side view mirror defroster


If your vehicle is equipped with the
OAD045324 side view mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on
The defroster heats the window to the rear window defroster.
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.

3-122
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A

Convenient features of your vehicle


1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
■ Type B
6. Air intake control button
7. A/C (Air conditioning) button

OAD045300/OAD045300N

3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle

Heating and Air Conditioning


1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.

OADA045302

3-124
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D, F) Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the
body and face. Additionally, each floor and the windshield with a small
outlet can be controlled to direct the amount directed to the side window
air discharged from the outlet. defrosters, and side vents.
3

Convenient features of your vehicle


Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F) Defrost-Level (A, D)

OAD045301 Air flow is directed towards the face Most of the air flow is directed to the
The mode selection button controls and the floor. windshield with a small amount of air
the direction of the air flow through directed to the side vents.
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash- Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Most of the air flow is directed to the
Defrost air position. floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.

3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) Instrument panel vents Temperature control


(if equipped)

OAD045304 OAD045305N
OAD045303 The temperature will increase by
The outlet vents can be opened ( )
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool or closed ( ) separately using the turning the knob to the right.
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air thumbwheel. The temperature will decrease by
flow is directed toward the upper Also, you can adjust the direction of turning the knob to the left.
body and face. air delivered from these vents using
In this mode, the air conditioning and the vent control lever as shown.
the recirculated air position cannot be
selected. Turn the fan speed mode to
adjust.

3-126
Air intake control Recirculated air position i Information
■ Type A With the recirculated air It should be noted that prolonged
position selected, air operation of the heater in the recircu-
from the passenger lated air position (without air condi-
compartment will be tioning selected) will cause fogging of
drawn through the heat- the windshield and side windows and
ing system and heated the air within the passenger compart-
or cooled according to ment will become stale. 3
the function selected. In addition, prolonged use of the air

Convenient features of your vehicle


conditioning with the recirculated air
OAD045306 Outside (fresh) air position position selected will result in exces-
■ Type B ■ Type A
sively dry air in the passenger com-
With the outside (fresh) partment.
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
■ Type B
cooled according to the
function selected.

OAD045333N

This button is used to select the out-


side (fresh) air position or recirculat-
ed air position.

3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle

Fan speed control Air conditioning (if equipped)


WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate OAD045308 OAD045309
control system operation in Turn the knob to the right to increase Press the A/C button to turn the sys-
the recirculated air position the fan speed and airflow. Turn the tem on (indicator light will illuminate)
(without the air conditioning knob to the left to decrease fan and off.
selected) may allow humidity speed and airflow.
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and Setting the fan speed control knob to
obscure visibility. the “0” position turns off the fan.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.

3-128
System Operation Operation Tips Air conditioning
Ventilation • To keep dust or unpleasant fumes All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
from entering the car through the Systems are filled with environmen-
1. Select the Face Level mode.
ventilation system, temporarily set tally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
2. Set the air intake control to the the air intake control to the recircu- 1. Start the engine.
outside (fresh) air position. lated air position. Return the con-
trol to the fresh air position when 2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. the irritation has passed. This will 3. Set the mode to the Face Level 3
help keep the driver alert and com- mode.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
fortable. 4. Set the air intake control to the

Convenient features of your vehicle


desired speed.
• To prevent the inside of the wind- recirculated air position. However,
shield from fogging, set the air prolonged operation of the recircu-
Heating intake control to the fresh air posi- lated air position will excessively
1. Select the Floor Level mode. tion and fan speed to the desired dry the air. In this case, change the
2. Set the air intake control to the position, turn on the air conditioning air position.
outside (fresh) air position. system, and adjust the temperature 5. Adjust the fan speed control and
3. Set the temperature control to the control to desired temperature. temperature control to maintain
desired position. maximum comfort.
4. Set the fan speed control to the When maximum cooling is desired,
desired speed. set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, speed control to the highest speed.
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost mode or press
the Front Defrost mode.

3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE Air conditioning system operation • If you operate air conditioner


tips excessively, the difference between
When using the air conditioning the temperature of the outside air
• If the vehicle has been parked in
system, monitor the engine tem- and that of the windshield could
direct sunlight during hot weather,
perature gauge closely while driv- cause the outer surface of the
open the windows for a short time
ing up hills or in heavy traffic windshield to fog up, causing loss
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
when outside temperatures are of visibility. In this case, set the
escape.
high. Air conditioning system mode selection knob or button to
operation can cause engine over- • After sufficient cooling has been the position and fan speed
heating. Continue to use the blow- achieved, switch back from the control to the lower speed.
er fan, but turn the air condition- recirculated air to the fresh outside
ing system off if the engine tem- air position.
perature gauge indicates engine • To help reduce moisture inside of
overheating. the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the win-
dows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.

3-130
System Maintenance Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and WARNING
Climate control air filter
compressor lubricant
Because the refriger-
Outside air When the amount of refrigerant is ant is at very high
low, the performance of the air con- pressure, the air con-
Recirculated
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also ditioning system
air has a negative influence on the air should only be serv-
conditioning system. iced by trained and certified 3
Therefore, if abnormal operation is technicians. It is important that

Convenient features of your vehicle


found, have the system inspected by the correct type and amount of
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
Blower erwise damage to the vehicle
Climate control Heater core and personal injury may occur.
Evaporator NOTICE
air filter core
1LDA5047
It is important that the correct
This filter is installed behind the glove type and amount of oil and refrig- The air conditioning system should
box. It filters the dust or other pollu- erant is used. Otherwise, damage be serviced by an authorized
tants that enter the vehicle through the to the compressor and abnormal HYUNDAI dealer.
heating and air conditioning system. system operation may occur.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air condi-
tioner filter inspections and changes
are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle

Air Conditioning refrigerant label Each symbols and specification on air


conditioning refrigerant label means
■ Example
as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail


location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
ODH043365

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant


label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

3-132
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Driver's temperature control knob


2. Passenger’s temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. SYNC button 3
5. OFF button

Convenient features of your vehicle


6. Fan speed control button
7. Mode selection button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Front windshield defrost button
10. Air intake control button
11. Rear window defrost button
12. Climate control information screen

NOTICE
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.

OAD045310

3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Heating and Air To turn the automatic operation off,


Conditioning select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
OAD045312 The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
2. Turn the temperature control knob operate automatically.
OAD045311
to the desired temperature. If the
temperature is set to the lowest For your convenience and to improve
The Automatic Climate Control setting (Lo), the air conditioning the effectiveness of the climate con-
System is controlled by setting the system will operate continuously. trol, use the AUTO button and set the
desired temperature. temperature to 73°F (23°C).
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by the temperature set-
ting you select.

3-134
Manual Heating and Air 3. Set the temperature control to the
Conditioning desired position.
The heating and cooling system can 4. Set the air intake control to the
be controlled manually by pushing outside (fresh) air position.
buttons other than the AUTO button. 5. Set the fan speed control to the
In this case, the system works desired speed.
sequentially according to the order of 6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
buttons selected. the air conditioning system on. 3
When pressing any button except the 7. Press the AUTO button in order to

Convenient features of your vehicle


AUTO button while using automatic convert to full automatic control of
operation, the functions not selected the system.
OAD045313
will be controlled automatically.
NOTICE 1. Start the engine.
Never place anything near the 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
sensor to ensure better control of tion.
the heating and cooling system. To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:

3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle

Mode selection

OAD045314

The mode selection button controls


the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.

OADA045302

3-136
The air flow outlet direction is cycled
as follows: Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the


floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Face-Level (B, D) 3

Convenient features of your vehicle


Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
OAD045316
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet. Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air Most of the air flow is directed to the
being directed to the windshield and windshield with a small amount of air
side window defrosters. directed to the side window defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face


and the floor.

3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle

Temperature control

OAD045304 OAD045318
Instrument panel vents OAD045317 Adjusting the driver and passenger
The outlet vents can be opened ( ) side temperature equally
Turn the knob to the right to increase
or closed ( ) separately using the the fan speed temperature and air- • Press the "SYNC" button to oper-
thumbwheel. flow. Turn the knob to the left to ate the driver and passenger side
Also, you can adjust the direction of decrease fan temperature. temperature equally.
air delivered from these vents using The temperature will increase or The passenger side temperature
the vent control lever as shown. decrease by 1°F/0.5°C for each but- will be set to the same temperature
ton press. When set to the lowest as the driver side temperature.
temperature setting, the air condi- • Turn the left temperature control
tioning will operate continuously. knob. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.

3-138
Adjusting the driver and passen- Air intake control Recirculated air position
ger side temperature individually With the recirculated air
Press the "SYNC" button again to position selected, air
operate the driver and passenger from the passenger
side temperature individually. The compartment will be
button indicator will turn off. drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
Temperature conversion
or cooled according to 3
the function selected.
If the battery has been discharged or

Convenient features of your vehicle


disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit. Outside (fresh) air position
To change the temperature unit from With the outside (fresh)
°F to °C or °C to °F: OAD045319 air position selected, air
This button is used to select the out- enters the vehicle from
- On the instrument cluster, go to outside and is heated or
User Settings Mode ➝ Other side (fresh) air position or recirculat-
ed air position. cooled according to the
Features ➝ Temperature Unit. function selected.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system) i Information
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
Both the temperature unit on the selected will result in excessively dry
cluster LCD display and climate con- air in the passenger compartment.
trol screen will change.

3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle

Fan speed control Air conditioning


WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate OAD045320 OAD045321
control system operation in The fan speed can be set to the Push the A/C button to manually turn
the recirculated air position desired speed by pushing the fan the system on (indicator light will illu-
(without the air conditioning speed control button. minate) and off.
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle The higher the fan speed is, the
which may fog the glass and more air is delivered.
obscure visibility. Pressing the OFF button turns off the
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with fan.
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri- i Information
ous injury or death due to a For better sound quality, fan speed
drop in the oxygen level may automatically slow down for a
and/or body temperature. couple of minutes when you activate
voice recognition or hands free.

3-140
OFF mode System Operation Operation Tips
Ventilation • To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
1. Select the Face Level mode.
ventilation system, temporarily set
2. Set the air intake control to the the air intake control to the recircu-
outside (fresh) air position. lated air position. Return the con-
3. Set the temperature control to the trol to the fresh air position when
desired position. the irritation has passed. This will 3
4. Set the fan speed control to the help keep the driver alert and com-
fortable.

Convenient features of your vehicle


desired speed.
• To prevent the inside of the wind-
shield from fogging, set the air
Heating intake control to the fresh air posi-
OAD045322
1. Select the Floor Level mode. tion and fan speed to the desired
Push the OFF button of the front to 2. Set the air intake control to the position, turn on the air conditioning
turn off the air climate control sys- outside (fresh) air position. system, and adjust the temperature
tem. You can still operate the mode control to desired temperature.
and air intake buttons as long as the 3. Set the temperature control to the
ignition switch is in the ON position. desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost mode or press
the Front Defrost mode.

3-141
Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning NOTICE Air conditioning system operation


All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning tips
When using the air conditioning
Systems are filled with environmen- • If the vehicle has been parked in
system, monitor the engine tem-
tally friendly R-134a refrigerant. direct sunlight during hot weather,
perature gauge closely while driv-
1. Start the engine. open the windows for a short time
ing up hills or in heavy traffic
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
2. Push the air conditioning button. when outside temperatures are
escape.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine over- • After sufficient cooling has been
mode. achieved, switch back from the
heating. Continue to use the blow-
4. Set the air intake control to the er fan, but turn the air condition- recirculated air to the fresh outside
recirculated air position. However, ing system off if the engine tem- air position.
prolonged operation of the recircu- perature gauge indicates engine • To help reduce moisture inside of
lated air position will excessively overheating. the windows on rainy or humid
dry the air. In this case, change the days, decrease the humidity inside
air position. the vehicle by operating the air
5. Adjust the fan speed control and conditioning system with the win-
temperature control to maintain dows and sunroof closed.
maximum comfort. • Use the air conditioning system
When maximum cooling is desired, every month only for a few minutes
set the temperature control to the to ensure maximum system per-
extreme left position then set the fan formance.
speed control to the highest speed.

3-142
• If you operate air conditioner System Maintenance Checking the amount of air
excessively, the difference between conditioner refrigerant and
the temperature of the outside air
Climate control air filter
compressor lubricant
and that of the windshield could When the amount of refrigerant is
cause the outer surface of the Outside air
low, the performance of the air con-
windshield to fog up, causing loss ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
of visibility. In this case, set the Recirculated
air has a negative influence on the air
mode selection knob or button to conditioning system. 3
the position and fan speed
control to the lower speed. Therefore, if abnormal operation is

Convenient features of your vehicle


found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Blower
Climate control Heater core
Evaporator NOTICE
air filter core
1LDA5047
It is important that the correct
This filter is installed behind the glove type and amount of oil and refrig-
box. It filters the dust or other pollu- erant is used. Otherwise, damage
tants that enter the vehicle through the to the compressor and abnormal
heating and air conditioning system. system operation may occur.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air con-
ditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-143
Convenient features of your vehicle

Air Conditioning refrigerant label Each symbols and specification on


WARNING air conditioning refrigerant label
■ Example
means as below :
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high 1. Classification of refrigerant
pressure, the air con- 2. Amount of refrigerant
ditioning system 3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
should only be serv- cant
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
oil and refrigerant is used, oth- location of the air conditioning refrig-
erwise damage to the vehicle erant label.
and personal injury may occur. ODH043365

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant


The air conditioning system should label in the vehicle may differ from the
be serviced by an authorized illustration.
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-144
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
• For maximum defrosting, set the Manual Climate Control System
WARNING temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
Windshield heating control to the highest speed.
Do not use the or posi- • If warm air to the floor is desired
tion during cooling operation in while defrosting or defogging, set the
extremely humid weather. The mode to the floor-defrost position.
difference between the temper- • Before driving, clear all snow and 3
ature of the outside air and that ice from the windshield, rear win- ■ Type A ■ Type B
of the windshield could cause

Convenient features of your vehicle


dow, side view mirrors, and all side
the outer surface of the wind- windows.
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility could cause an acci- • Clear all snow and ice from the
dent resulting in serious injury hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to OAD045325N
or death. In this case, set the improve heater and defroster effi-
To defog inside windshield
mode selection knob or button ciency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up the inside of the wind- 1. Select any fan speed except “0”
to the position and fan position.
speed control knob or button to shield.
a lower speed. 2. Select desired temperature.
NOTICE 3. Select the or position.
If the engine temperature is still 4. The outside (fresh) air will be select-
cold after starting, then a brief ed automatically. Additionally, the air
engine warm up period may be conditioning will automatically oper-
required for the vented air flow to ate if the mode is selected to the
become warm or hot. position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.

3-145
Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Climate Control


System

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAD045326N OAD045328
To defrost outside windshield To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest OAD045327 1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position. To defog inside windshield (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme 1. Select desired fan speed. 2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot position. hot (HI) position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the position. 3. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con- 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
ditioning will be selected automat- 4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.
ically. be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
If the outside (fresh) air position is fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
not selected automatically, adjust the speed.
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.

3-146
Defogging logic (if equipped) Manual climate control system Automatic climate control system
To reduce the probability of fogging 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
up the inside of the windshield, the position. position.
air intake or air conditioning are con- 2. Press the defroster button ( ). 2. Press the defroster button ( ).
trolled automatically according to
3. Press the air intake control button 3. While pressing the air conditioning
certain conditions such as or
at least 5 times within 10 seconds. button (A/C), press the air intake
position. To cancel or return the
The indicator on the air 3 seconds control button at least 5 times with-
defogging logic, do the following.
in 3 seconds. 3
immediately blinks 3 times with 0.5
seconds of interval. It indicates that The climate control information

Convenient features of your vehicle


the defogging logic is canceled or screen will blink 3 times with 0.5 sec-
returned to the programmed status. onds of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status. If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.

3-147
Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto Defogging System (Only When the Auto Defogging When the Auto Defogging System is
for Automatic Climate Control System operates, the indi- reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
System, if equipped) cator will illuminate. times without a signal.

If higher level of moisture are sensed in i Information


the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System • When the air conditioning is turned
will operate in the following order: on by Auto defogging system, if you
Step 1 : Outside air position try to turn off the air conditioning, the
Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning indicator will blink 3 times and the air
conditioning will not be turned off.
Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield • For efficiency, do not select recircu-
lated air position while Auto defog-
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward ging system is operating.
the windshield
• When Auto defogging mode is
OAD045331 If the air conditioning is off or recircu- selected, fan speed, temperature and
lated air position is manually selected intake mode which is adjusted man-
Auto defogging reduces the possibil- while Auto Defogging System is ON, ually are canceled for better defog-
ity of fogging up the inside of the the Auto Defogging System Indicator ging result.
windshield by automatically sensing will blink 3 times to signal that the
the moisture of inside the windshield. manual operation has been canceled.
The auto defogging system operates NOTICE
To cancel or reset the
when the heater or air conditioning is Auto Defogging System Do not remove the sensor cover
on. located on the upper end of the
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni- driver side windshield glass.
i Information tion switch is in the ON position. Damage to system parts could
The auto defogging system may not When the Auto Defogging System is occur and may not be covered by
operate normally, when the outside canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink your vehicle warranty.
temperature is below 50 °F (-10 °C). 3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-
played on the climate control infor-
mation screen.
3-148
CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic Ventilation Sunroof Inside Air
(if equipped) Recirculation (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON When the heater or air conditioning
position or when the engine is run- system is on with the sunroof
ning and temperature is below 59°F opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
(15°C) with the recirculated air posi- tion will be automatically selected. At
tion selected more than five minutes, this time, if you press the recirculated
the air intake position will automati- air position button, the recirculated 3
cally change to the outside (fresh) air air position will be selected but will

Convenient features of your vehicle


position. change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
To cancel or reset the Automatic When the sunroof is closed, the air
Ventilation intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
When the air conditioning system is
on, select Face Level mode and
while pressing the A/C button, press
the recirculated air position button
five times within three seconds.

3-149
Convenient features of your vehicle

STORAGE COMPARTMENT
Center Console Storage Sliding Armrest
WARNING
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.

WARNING
OAD045411/Q OAD045435/Q
ALWAYS keep the storage com-
partment covers closed secure- To open : To move the armrest forward:
ly while driving. Items inside Grab and hold the latch (1) on the Grab and hold the latch (1) on the
your vehicle are moving as fast arm rest then lift the lid. arm rest then slide the arm rest for-
as the vehicle. If you have to ward.
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
To move the armrest rearward:
of the compartment and may Push the armrest rearward.
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
WARNING
NOTICE Do not grab the front portion of
the armrest (1) when moving
To avoid possible theft, do not the armrest rearward. You may
leave valuables in the storage pinch your fingers.
compartments.

3-150
Glove Box Sunglass Holder
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring 3
the passengers in the vehicle.

Convenient features of your vehicle


• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
OAD045412 OAD045413 of the vehicle can be blocked
To open: To open: by an open sunglass holder.
Pull the lever (1). Push and release the cover and the • Do not put the glasses forcibly
holder will slowly open. Place your into a sunglass holder. It may
sunglasses in the compartment door cause personal injury if you
WARNING with the lenses facing out. try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
ALWAYS close the glove box To close:
door after use. Push back into position.
An open glove box door can Make sure the sunglass holder is
cause serious injury to the pas- closed while driving.
senger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.

3-151
Convenient features of your vehicle

Multi box

OAD045414

To open the cover, push the lip of the


cover all the way forward. To close
the cover, push and release the lip of
the cover forward and it will slowly
close.
For the safety of the passengers,
when the cover is closed, the cover
locks if the vehicle shakes by sudden
acceleration and braking.
To unlock the cover, press the cover
twice.

3-152
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup Holder Rear
WARNING
■ Front • Cup holders in center console rear:
Pull the cup holder cover rear- Keep cans or bottles out of
wards to completely unfold the cup direct sun light and do not put
holder. them in a hot vehicle. It may
• Cup holders in armrest: Pull the explode.
armrest down to use the cup hold-
ers. 3
NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle


WARNING • Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
OAD045416 drink. If liquid spills, it may get
■ Rear (if equipped)
• Avoid abrupt starting and
braking when the cup holder into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
is in use to prevent spilling tronic system and damage elec-
your drink. If hot liquid spills, trical/electronic parts.
you could be burned. Such a • When cleaning spilled liquids, do
burn to the driver could cause not dry the cup holder at high
loss of vehicle control result- temperature. This may damage
ing in an accident. the cup holder.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
OAD045417 cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
Cups or small beverages cups may vehicle is in motion. Injuries
be placed in the cup holders. may result in the event of sud-
Front cup holder liner can be removed den stop or collision.
for cleaning. • Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.

3-153
Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunvisor NOTICE Power Outlet (if equipped)


Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.

WARNING
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvi-
sor.

OAD045418L NOTICE OAD045419

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. • Do not put several tickets in the The power outlet is designed to pro-
To use a sunvisor for a side window, ticket holder at one time. This vide power for mobile telephones or
pull it downward, unsnap it from the could cause damage to the tick- other devices designed to operate
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). et holder. with vehicle electrical systems. The
• Avoid putting a plastic card devices should draw less than 180 W
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the (Watts) with the engine running.
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3). such as a credit card in the tick-
Adjust the sunvisor forward or back- et holder located in the outside
ward (4) as needed. Use the ticket of the sunvisor.This could cause
holder (5) to hold tickets (if equipped). damage to the plastic card.

3-154
NOTICE (Continued)
WARNING • Push the plug in as far as it will
To prevent damage to the Power go. If good contact is not made,
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not Outlets :
place your fingers or foreign the plug may overheat and the
• Use the power outlet only when fuse may open.
objects (pin, etc.) into a power the engine is running and
outlet or touch the power outlet • Plug in battery equipped electri-
remove the accessory plug after cal/electronic devices with
with a wet hand. use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
reverse current protection. The 3
current from the battery may
with the engine off could cause

Convenient features of your vehicle


flow into the vehicle’s electri-
the battery to discharge. cal/electronic system and cause
• Only use 12V electric acces- system malfunction.
sories which are less than 180 W
(Watts) in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
(Continued)

3-155
Convenient features of your vehicle

USB Charger (if equipped) A smart phone or a tablet PC, which Clock
adopts a different re-charging
method, may not be properly re- WARNING
charged. In this case, use an exclu-
sive charger of your device. Do not adjust the clock while
This USB charging terminal will not driving, you may lose your
allow you to play your media on the steering control and cause an
AVN unit. To connect your media to accident that results in severe
the AVN unit, use the USB port in the personal injury or death.
multi box and follow steps in Section
4 - Multimedia. For clock setting details, please refer
Setup Mode in chapter 4 or the
OAD045428
Multimedia System user's manual
that was supplied with your vehicle.
The USB charger is located inside
the console box between the driver’s
seat and the front passenger’s seat.
Insert the USB charger into the USB
port, and re-charge a smart phone or
a tablet PC.
A charging status/charging comple-
tion message is displayed on a
screen of a smart phone or a tablet
PC.
A smart phone or a tablet PC may
get warmer during the re-charging
process. It does not indicate any mal-
function with the charging system.

3-156
Clothes Hanger (if equipped) Floor Mat Anchor(s)
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi- 3
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.

Convenient features of your vehicle


• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
OAD045421 ODM042334
• Do not stack floor mats on top
To hang items, pull the hanger down. ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors of one another (e.g. all-weath-
These hangers are not designed to to attach the front floor mats to the er rubber mat on top of a car-
hold large or heavy items. vehicle. The anchors on the front peted floor mat). Only a single
floor carpet keep the floor mats from floor mat should be installed
sliding forward. in each position.
WARNING IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
Do not hang other objects
floor mat anchors that are
except clothes. In an accident it
designed to securely hold the
may cause vehicle damage or
floor mat in place. To avoid any
personal injury.
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.

3-157
Convenient features of your vehicle

Luggage Net Holder


(if equipped) WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of
the luggage net's recoil path. DO
NOT use the luggage net when
the strap has visible signs of
wear or damage.

OAD045423

To keep items from shifting in the trunk,


you can use the 4 holders located in
the trunk to attach the luggage net.
Make sure the luggage net is securely
attached to the holders in the trunk.

3-158
Multimedia System

Multimedia system .................................................4-2


AUX, USB and iPod® port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-4
How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5
Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7
Caring for CDs....................................................................4-8 4
Audio (Without Touch Screen) ..........................4-17
Features of Your Audio .................................................4-18
Radio Mode.......................................................................4-34
SiriusXM Radio Mode.....................................................4-37
Media Mode......................................................................4-39
Phone Mode .....................................................................4-45
Voice Recognition Mode ...............................................4-49
Setup Mode ......................................................................4-57
Declaration of conformity ..................................4-67
FCC......................................................................................4-67
Multimedia System

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
NOTICE AUX, USB and iPod® Port Antenna
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic devices may not
function properly.
• Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
OAD045427 OAD045424

You can use an AUX port or USB Shark fin antenna (1)
cable to connect audio devices to the The shark fin antenna will receive the
vehicle AUX or USB port.
transmit data (example: XM signal).

i Information
Glass antenna (2)
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
may occur during playback. If this receive both AM and FM signals.
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.

❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-2
NOTICE Steering Wheel Audio Control SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
• Do not clean the inside of the If the SEEK/PRESET switch is
rear glass window with a cleaner pressed up or down and held for 0.8
or scraper to remove foreign second or more, it will function in the
deposits as this may cause dam- following modes:
age to the antenna elements. RADIO mode
• Avoid adding metallic coatings It will function as the AUTO SEEK
to the rear glass window. These select button. It will SEEK until you
can degrade AM and FM broad- release the button.
cast signals.
MEDIA mode 4
It will function as the FF/RW button.

Multimedia System
OAD045446N

NOTICE If the SEEK/PRESET switch is


pressed up or down, it will function
Do not operate multiple audio
in the following modes:
remote control buttons simultane-
ously. RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1) TION UP/DOWN button.
• Press the VOLUME switch up to MEDIA mode
increase volume. It will function as the TRACK UP/
• Press the VOLUME switch down to DOWN button.
decrease volume.

4-3
Multimedia System

MODE (3) Bluetooth® Wireless (3) Microphone


Press the MODE button to toggle Technology Hands-Free Detailed information for the
through Radio, XM, Disc, or AUX Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
modes. hands-free is described later in this
chapter or in the Car Multimedia
i Information User's Manual.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described later in this chap- Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
ter or in the Car Multimedia User's Navigation System (AVN)
Manual that was supplied with this Detailed information for the AVN sys-
vehicle tem is described in the Car
OAD045447N Multimedia User's Manual.

OAD045430

You can use the phone wirelessly by


using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button

4-4
How Vehicle Audio Works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception
the distance from the radio station,
FM reception closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.

JBM002
4
AM broadcasts can be received at

Multimedia System
JBM001
greater distances than FM broad-
AM and FM radio signals are broad- casts. This is because AM radio
cast from transmitter towers located waves are transmitted at low fre-
around your city. They are intercept- quencies. These long distance, low
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- frequency radio waves can follow the
cle. This signal is then processed by curvature of the earth rather than
the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they
speakers. curve around obstructions resulting
When a strong radio signal has in better signal coverage.
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.

4-5
Multimedia System

FM radio station

JBM003 JBM004 JBM005


FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM signal
high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the sig- weakens, another more powerful
follow the earth's surface. Because nal will weaken and sound will signal near the same frequency
of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, we may begin to play. This is because
begin to fade within short distances suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto
from the station. Also, FM signals are stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs,
easily affected by buildings, moun- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a
tains, and obstructions. This can lead large obstructions between the stronger signal.
to undesirable or unpleasant listen- transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-
ing conditions which might lead you turb the signal causing static or flut- nals being received from several
to believe a problem exists with your tering noises to occur. Reducing the directions can cause distortion or
radio. The following conditions are treble level may lessen this effect fluttering. This can be caused by a
normal and do not indicate radio until the disturbance clears. direct and reflected signal from the
trouble: same station, or by signals from two
stations with close frequencies. If
this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.

4-6
Features of Your Vehicle • If you are driving on a mountain i Information
road where is the signal blocked by
Satellite radio reception mountains. There may also be additional unfore-
You may experience difficulties in seen circumstances leading to recep-
• If you are driving in an area with tall
receiving XM™ satellite radio signals tion problems with the XM™ satellite
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
in the following situations. radio signal.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for- Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
est. Unavailable’ may occur when starting
XM™ Radio.

Multimedia System
SATELLITE1

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a


covered parking area. SATELLITE2

• If you are driving beneath the top • The signal can become weak in
level of a multi-level freeway. some areas that are not covered by
• If you are driving under a bridge. the XM™ repeater network.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks block
the signal from the satellite.
4-7
Multimedia System

Caring for CDs • Depending on the type of CD- Using a cellular phone or a two-
R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may way radio
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to not operate normally according to When a cellular phone is used inside
the manufacturing companies. In the vehicle, noise may be produced
ventilate before using the system.
such circumstances, continued use from the audio system. This does not
• It is illegal to copy and use may cause malfunctions to your
MP3/WMA files without permission. mean that something is wrong with
audio system. the audio equipment. In such a case,
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means. try to operate mobile devices as far
i Information - Playing an from the audio equipment as possible.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal Incompatible Copy Protected
cleaners and magnetic sprays Audio CD CAUTION
made for analog disc onto CDs. Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio When using a communication
• To prevent the disc surface from system such as a cellular phone
getting damaged, hold CDs by the CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
edges or the center hole only. separate external antenna must
that inabilities to properly play a copy
• Clean the disc surface with a piece protected CD may indicate that the be fitted. When a cellular phone
of soft cloth before playback (wipe it CD is defective, not the CD player. or a radio set is used with an
from the center to the outside internal antenna alone, it may
edge). interfere with the vehicle's electri-
• Do not damage the disc surface or cal system and adversely affect
attach pieces of sticky tape or safe operation of the vehicle.
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted WARNING
into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time). Do not use a cellular phone
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to while driving. Stop at a safe
protect them from scratches or dirt. location to use a cellular phone
or set up the hands-free calling
feature.
4-8
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
WARNING
1. Song playing order : to • Do not stare at the screen
sequentially. while driving. Staring at the
2. Folder playing order : screen for prolonged periods
❋ If no song file is contained in the of time could lead to traffic
folder, that folder is not displayed. accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric 4
shock.

Multimedia System
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents. Use
the phone feature after parking
your vehicle, or set up hands-
free calling feature.
• Use caution not to spill water
or liquids near the audio
device. Doing so may lead to a
product malfunction or intro-
duce an electrical short cir-
cuit.

4-9
Multimedia System

NOTICE i Information - Using CDs


CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close to • This device has been manufactured
• Operating the device while the audio system. Spilling bever- to be compatible with software
driving could lead to acci- ages may lead to system mal- bearing the following logo marks.
dents due to a lack of atten- function. • Do not clean discs with chemical
tion to external surroundings. • If your audio system is not work- solutions, such as record sprays,
First park the vehicle before ing properly, have your vehicle antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
operating the device. audio system inspected by an benzene, or thinners.
• Adjust the volume to levels authorized Hyundai dealer. • After using a disc, put the disc back
that allow the driver to hear • Placing the audio system within in its original case to prevent disc
sounds from outside of the an electromagnetic environment scratches.
vehicle. Driving with the audio may result in noise interference.
volume at a level where exter- • Hold discs by their edges or within
nal sounds cannot be heard • Use caution to keep chemicals the center hole to prevent damages
may lead to an accident. such as perfumes, cosmetics, to disc surfaces.
sun screen lotions, hand sanitiz- • Do not introduce foreign substances
• Pay attention to the volume ers, or air fresheners from con-
setting when turning the into the disc insert/eject slot.
tacting any interior components. Introducing foreign substances
device on. A sudden output of Doing so may cause damage or
extreme volume upon turning could damage the device interior.
discoloration.
the device on could lead to • Do not insert two discs simultane-
hearing impairment. (Adjust ously.
the volume to a suitable level • When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
before turning off the device.) differences in disc reading and play-
ing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
as used by the user.
(Continued)

4-10
(Continued) (Continued) i Information - Using the USB
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the • Do not use abnormally shaped discs device
disc surface (coated side) with a soft (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped)
cloth. as such discs could lead to malfunc- • Connect the USB device after turn-
tions. ing on the engine. The USB device
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become damaged if it is already
attached with labels may result in • If the disc is straddled on the disc connected when the ignition is
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc slot without removal for 10 seconds, turned on.The USB device may not
removal. Such discs may also result the disc will automatically be re- operate properly if the car ignition
in noise while playing. inserted into the disc player. is turned on or off with the USB
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not • Only genuine audio CDs are sup- device connected.
properly operate depending on the ported. Other discs may result in • Heed caution to static electricity 4
disc manufacturer, production recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R, when connecting/disconnecting USB

Multimedia System
method and the record method as CDs with labels) devices.
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as con- • Encoded MP3 Players will not be
tinued use may result in malfunc- recognized when connected as an
tions. external device.
• The performance of this product • When connecting an external USB
may differ depending on the CD- device, the device may not properly
RW Drive Software. recognize the USB is in some states.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type • Only products formatted with
CDs may not function in the device. byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
DATA discs cannot be played. recognized.
(However, such discs may still oper- • This device recognizes USB devices
ate but will do so abnormally.) formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
(Continued) mats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)

4-11
Multimedia System

(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)


• Some USB devices may not be sup- • Do not use the USB I/F to charge • Charging through the USB may not
ported due to compatibility issues. batteries or USB accessories that work for some mobile devices.
• Avoid contact between the USB con- generate heat. Such acts may lead to • The device may not support normal
nector with bodily parts or foreign worsened performance or damage operation when using a USB memo-
objects. to the device. ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting • The device may not recognize the USB Memory.
of USB devices within short periods USB device if separately purchased • The device may not support normal
of time may result in product mal- USB hubs and extension cables are operation when using formats such
function. being used. Connect the USB direct- as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
ly with the multimedia terminal of
• A strange noise may occur when dis- the vehicle. • The device will not support files
connecting the USB. locked by DRM (Digital Rights
• When using mass storage USB Management.)
• Make sure to connect/disconnect devices with separate logical drives,
external USB devices with the audio only files saved to the root drive can • USB memory sticks used by con-
power turned off. be played. necting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF
• The amount of time required to rec- Type) may not be properly recog-
• Files may not properly operate if nized.
ognize the USB device may differ application programs are installed
depending on the type, size or file to the USBs. • The device may not operate proper-
formats stored in the USB. Such dif- ly when using USB HDDs or USBs
ferences in time are not indications • The device may not operate normal- subject to connection failures
of malfunctions. ly if MP3 Players, cellular phones, caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-
digital cameras, or other electronic stick type)
• The device only supports USB devices (USB devices not recognized
devices used to play music files. as portable disk drives) are connect- (Continued)
• USB images and videos are not sup- ed with the device.
ported. (Continued)
(Continued)

4-12
(Continued) i Information - Using the (Continued)
• Avoid use of USB mem- iPod® device • When the EQ features of an exter-
ory products that can nal device, such as the iPod®, and
also be used as key • iPod® is a registered trademark of the audio system are both active, EQ
chains or mobile phone Apple Inc. effects could overlap and cause
accessories. Use of such products • In order to use the iPod® while oper- sound deterioration and distortion.
may cause damage to the USB jack. ating the keys, you must use a dedi- Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
• Connecting an MP3 device or phone cated iPod® cable. (the cable that is feature within the external device
through various channels, such as supplied when purchasing iPod® upon use by connecting with the
AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may /iPhone® products) audio system.
result in pop noises or abnormal • If the iPod® is connected to the vehi- • Noise may occur when an iPod® or 4
operation. cle while it is playing, a high pitch AUX device is connected. When
sound could occur for approximate- such devices are not being used, dis-

Multimedia System
ly 1-2 seconds immediately after connect the device for storage.
connecting. If possible, connect the • When the iPod® or AUX device
iPod to the vehicle with the iPod® power is connected to the power
stopped/ paused. jack, playing the external device
• During ACC ON state, connecting may result in noise. In such cases,
the iPod® through the iPod® cable disconnect the power connection
will charge the iPod® through the before use.
car audio system. • Skipping or improper operation
• When connecting with the iPod® may occur depending on the charac-
cable, make sure to fully insert the teristics of your iPod® /Phone®
jack to prevent communication device.
interference. (Continued)
(Continued)

4-13
Multimedia System

(Continued) (Continued) i Information - Using the AUX


• If your iPhone® is connected to both • Some iPod®s may not sync with the device
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology System depending on its version. If
and USB, the sound may not be the Media is removed before the • If an external device connector is
properly played. In your iPhone®, Media is recognized, then the sys- connected with the AUX terminal,
select the Dock connector or tem may not properly restore the then AUX mode will automatically
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to previously operated mode. (iPad® operate. Once the connector is dis-
change the sound output (source). charging is not supported.) connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• iPod mode cannot be operated when
the iPod® cannot be recognized due • AUX mode can be used only when
to versions that do not support com- an external audio player (cam-
munication protocols. corder, in-car DVD player, etc.) has
been connected.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano
devices, the iPod® may not be recog- • The AUX volume can be controlled
nized when the battery level is low. separately from other audio modes.
Please charge the iPod® for use. • Connecting a connector jack to the
• Search/play orders shown within AUX terminal without an external
the iPod® device may differ with the device will convert the system to
orders shown within the audio sys- AUX mode, but only output noise.
tem. When an external device is not
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to an being used, also remove the connec-
iPod® device defect, reset the iPod® tor jack.
and try again. (To learn more, refer to • When the external device power is
your iPod® manual) connected to the power jack, play-
(Continued) ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.

4-14
i Information - Before using i Information - Precautions for i Information - When connect-
the Bluetooth® handsfree safe driving ing a Bluetooth® phone
What is Bluetooth® ? • Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature • Before connecting the head unit
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis- that enables drivers to practice safe with the mobile phone, check to see
tance wireless networking technolo- driving. Connecting the head unit that the mobile phone supports
gy which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz with a Bluetooth® phone allows the Bluetooth® features.
frequency to connect various user to conveniently make and • Even if the phone supports
devices within a certain distance. receive calls and use contacts. Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully found during device searches if the
• Supported within PCs, external read the contents of this user’s man-
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, phone has been set to hidden state
ual. or the Bluetooth® power is turned 4
various electronic devices, and auto-
motive environments, Bluetooth® • Excessive use or operations while off. Disable the hidden state or turn

Multimedia System
allows data to be transmitted at high driving may lead to negligent driv- on the Bluetooth® power prior to
speeds without having to use a con- ing practices and result in accidents. searching/connecting with the Head
nector cable. Refrain from excessive operations unit.
while driving. • Bluetooth® phone is automatically
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to con- • Viewing the screen for prolonged connected when the ignition on.
veniently make phone calls with periods of time is dangerous and • If you do not want automatic con-
Bluetooth® mobile phones through may lead to accidents. When driv- nection with your Bluetooth®
the audio system. ing, view the screen only for short device, turn off the Bluetooth® fea-
periods of time. ture within your mobile phone.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. To learn • The Handsfree call volume and
more about mobile device compatibility, quality may differ depending on the
visit www. hyundaiusa.com. mobile phone.
(Continued)

4-15
Multimedia System

(Continued) i Information - Using the voice (Continued)


• Park the vehicle when connecting recognition - When driving on rugged and
the head unit with the mobile phone. uneven roads
• When using the voice recognition
• Bluetooth® connection may become feature, only commands listed with- - During severe rain (heavy rains,
intermittently disconnected in some in the user's manual are supported. windstorms)
mobile phones. Follow these steps to • Phone related voice commands can
try again. • Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system, be used only when a Bluetooth®
1.Within the mobile phone, turn the pressing any key other than the Wireless Technology device is con-
Bluetooth® function off/on and try key terminate the voice recognition nected.
again. mode. • When making calls by stating a
2.Turn the mobile phone power • For superior voice recognition per- name, the corresponding contact
Off/On and try again. formance, position the microphone must be downloaded and stored
3.Completely remove the mobile used for voice recognition above the within the audio system.
phone battery, reboot, and then head of the driver’s seat and main- • After downloading the Bluetooth®
again. tain a proper position when saying Wireless Technology phone book, it
4.Reboot the Audio System and try commands. takes some times to convert the
again. • Within the following situations, phone book data into voice informa-
voice recognition may not function tion. During this time, voice recogni-
5.Delete all paired devices, pair and tion may not properly operate.
try again. properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof • Pronounce the voice commands nat-
• Handsfree call quality and volume urally and clearly as if in a normal
may differ depending on the model are open
conversation.
of your mobile phone. - When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)

4-16
AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)

■ Type A-1 (With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology) ■ Type A-2

Multimedia System
ADA50000EU/ADA50001EU

4-17
Multimedia System

Features of Your Audio (2) RADIO (Type A-1) (4) PHONE (Type A-1)
• Changes to FM/AM mode. • Operates Phone Screen.
• Each time the button is pressed, • The connection screen will be dis-
the mode is changed in the order played when a phone is not con-
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM. nected.
• In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when (5) SEEK TRACK
[Mode Pop up] is turned [On]. • Radio mode : Automatically search-
When the pop up screen is dis- es for broadcast frequencies.
played, use the TUNE knob or
Preset buttons to select the • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music* mode
desired mode. - Short press : Moves to next or
previous song (file).
(3) MEDIA - Press and hold : Rewinds or fast-
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, forwards the current song.
My Music*, BT(Bluetooth®), Audio* • Bluetooth® Audio* mode : Moves to
mode. next or previous song (file).
(1) EJECT
• Each time the button is pressed, the - The Play/Pause feature may
• Ejects the compact disc (CD). operate differently depending on
mode is changed in the order of CD
➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music* the mobile phone.
➟ BT(Bluetooth®) Audio*. * if equipped
• In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when (6) PWR/VOL knob
[Mode Pop up] is turned [On]. • Power knob : Press the knob to
When the pop up screen is dis- turn power On/Off.
played, use the TUNE knob or
Preset buttons to select the • Volume knob : Sets volume by
desired mode. turning the knob left/right.
* if equipped
4-18
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode
- Short press : Previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
- Press and hold : Previews the
• Radio mode : Saves frequencies broadcasts saved in Preset [1] ~
(channels) or receives saved fre- [6] for 5 seconds each.
quencies (channels).
- Press the [SCAN] button again
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music* mode to continue listening to the cur-
- [RPT] : Repeat rent frequency.
- [RDM] : Random • CD, USB, My Music* mode
4
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and - Short press : Previews each

Multimedia System
Menu pop up screen, the number song (file) for 10 seconds each.
menu is selected. - Press the [SCAN] button again
(8) DISP
* if equipped to continue listening to the cur-
• Each short press toggles through rent song (file).
the following modes : Screen Off ➟
Screen On ➟ Screen Off. * if equipped
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the Screen will be turned Off. (10) SETUP/CLOCK
• In the Screen Off state, press any • Moves to the Display, Sound,
button to turn the Screen On again. Clock, Phone, System setting
menu.

4-19
Multimedia System

(11) MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
• iPod® List : Move to parent catego-
ry.

(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD/USB mode
- Folder Search

(13) TUNE knob


• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music* mode : (14) FM (Type A-2)
Searches songs (files) by turning • Changes to FM mode.
the knob left/right. When the • Each time the button is pressed,
desired song is displayed, press the mode is changed in the order
the knob to play the song. of FM1 ➟ FM2.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus. (15) AM (Type A-2)
* if equipped • Changes to AM mode.

4-20
■ Type A-3 (With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology) ■ Type A-4

Multimedia System
ADA50002EU/ADA50003EU

4-21
Multimedia System

Features of Your Audio (2) RADIO (Type A-3) (4) PHONE (Type A-3)
• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode. • Operates Phone Screen.
• Each time the button is pressed, • The connection screen will be dis-
the mode is changed in the order played when a phone is not con-
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 nected.
➟ XM3.
• In Setup>Display, the radio pop up (5) SEEK TRACK
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned [On]. • Radio mode : Automatically search-
When the pop up screen is dis- es for broadcast frequencies.
played, use the TUNE knob or • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music* mode
Preset buttons to select the - Short press : Moves to next or
desired mode. previous song (file).
- Press and hold : Rewinds or fast-
(3) MEDIA forwards the current song.
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, • Bluetooth® Audio* mode : Moves to
(1) EJECT My Music*, BT(Bluetooth®) Audio* next or previous song (file).
• Ejects the compact disc (CD). mode. - The Play/Pause feature may
• Each time the button is pressed, the operate differently depending on
mode is changed in the order of CD the mobile phone.
➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music* * if equipped
➟ BT(Bluetooth®) Audio*.
• In Setup>Display, the media pop up (6) PWR/VOL knob
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned [On]. When • Power knob : Press the knob to
the pop up screen is displayed, use turn power On/Off.
the TUNE knob or Preset buttons to • Volume knob : Sets volume by
select the desired mode. turning the knob left/right.
* if equipped
4-22
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode
- Short press : Previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
- Press and hold : Previews the
• Radio mode : Saves frequencies broadcasts saved in Preset [1] ~
(channels) or receives saved fre- [6] for 5 seconds each.
quencies (channels).
- Press the [SCAN] button again
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music* mode to continue listening to the cur-
- [RPT] : Repeat rent frequency.
- [RDM] : Random - XM Radio does not support the
4
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Preset scan feature.

Multimedia System
Menu pop up screen, the number • CD, USB, My Music* mode
menu is selected. - Short press : Previews each
(8) DISP
* if equipped song (file) for 10 seconds each.
• Each short press toggles through
the following modes : Screen Off ➟ - Press the [SCAN] button again
Screen On ➟ Screen Off. to continue listening to the cur-
rent song (file).
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the Screen will be turned Off. * if equipped
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again. (10) SETUP/CLOCK
• Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting
menu.

4-23
Multimedia System

(11) MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
• iPod® List : Move to parent catego-
ry.

(12) CAT/FOLDER
• Radio mode
- SiriusXM Radio : Category Search.
• MP3 CD/USB mode
- Folder Search

(13) TUNE knob


(14) FM/AM (Type A-4)
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right. • Changes to FM/AM mode.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music* mode : • Each time the button is pressed,
Searches songs (files) by turning the mode is changed in the order
the knob left/right. When the of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM.
desired song is displayed, press
the knob to play the song. (15) XM (Type A-4)
• Moves focus in all selection menus • Changes to XM mode.
and selects menus. • Each time the button is pressed,
* if equipped the mode is changed in the order
of XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.

4-24
i Information (Continued)
- Using Compact Discs • Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not oper-
• If the temperature inside the car is ate normally depending on manu-
too high, open the car windows to facturing company or recording
ventilate before using the system. methods.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permis-
sion. Use CDs that are created only i Information
by lawful means. - Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio CD
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as 4
benzene or thinner, use normal Some copy protected CDs, which do
cleaners and magnetic sprays made not comply with international audio

Multimedia System
for CDs. CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
• To prevent the disc surface from that inabilities to properly play a copy
getting damaged, hold CDs by the protected CD may indicate that the
edges or the center hole only. CD is defective, not the CD player.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe it
from the center to the outside edge). NOTE:
• Do not damage the disc surface or Order of playing files (folders) :
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper. 1. Song playing order : to
• Make certain only CDs are inserted sequentially.
into the CD player (Do not insert 2. Folder playing order :
more than one CD at a time). ❋ If no song file is contained in
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to the folder, that folder is not dis-
protect them from scratches or dirt. played.
(Continued)

4-25
Multimedia System

WARNING (Continued) WARNING


• Please refrain from use if the
Audio System Safety Warnings screen is blank or no sound Distracted Driving
• Do not stare at the screen can be heard as these signs Driving while distracted can
while driving. Staring at the may indicate product malfunc- result in a loss of vehicle con-
screen for prolonged periods tion. Continued use in such trol that may lead to an acci-
of time could lead to traffic conditions could lead to acci- dent, severe personal injury,
accidents. dents (fires, electric shock) or and death. The driver’s primary
product malfunctions. responsibility is in the safe and
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys- • Do not touch the antenna dur- legal operation of a vehicle, and
tem. Such acts could result in ing thunder or lightening as use of any handheld devices,
accidents, fire, or electric such acts may lead to light- other equipment, or vehicle sys-
shock. ning induced electric shock. tems which take the driver’s
• Do not stop or park in park- eyes, attention and focus away
• Using the phone while driving from the safe operation of a
may lead to a lack of attention ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could vehicle or which are not permis-
of traffic conditions and sible by law should never be
increase the likelihood of lead to traffic accidents.
used during operation of the
accidents. Use the phone fea- vehicle.
ture after parking the vehicle.
• Exercise caution not to spill
water or introduce foreign
objects into the device. Such
acts could lead to smoke, fire,
or product malfunction.
(Continued)

4-26
i Information NOTICE i Information
Turn on the car ignition before using • Do not subject the device to - Using the USB Devices
this device. Do not operate the audio severe shock or impact. Direct • To use an external USB device,
system for long periods of time with pressure onto the front side of make sure the device is not connect-
the ignition turned off as such opera- the monitor may cause damage ed when starting up the vehicle.
tions may lead to battery discharge. to the LCD or touch screen. Connect the device after starting up.
• When cleaning the device, make • If you start the engine when the
sure to turn off the device and USB device is connected, it may
use a dry and smooth cloth. damage the USB device. (USB flash-
Never use rough materials, drives are very sensitive to electric
chemical cloths, or solvents shock.) 4
(alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) • If the engine is started up or turned

Multimedia System
as such materials may damage off while the external USB device is
the device panel or cause connected, the external USB device
color/quality deterioration. may not work.
• Do not place beverages close to • The System may not play unauthen-
the audio system. Spilling bever- ticated MP3 or WMA files.
ages may lead to system mal-
function. 1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between 8Kbps ~
• Placing the audio system within 320Kbps.
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference. 2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
i Information • Take precautions for static electricity
In case of product malfunction, please when connecting or disconnecting
contact your dealer or vehicle service the external USB device.
center. (Continued)

4-27
Multimedia System

(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)


• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not • You may hear a strange noise when • If you use devices such as a USB hub
recognizable. connecting or disconnecting a USB purchased separately, the vehicle’s
• Depending on the condition of the device. audio system may not recognize the
external USB device, the connected • If you disconnect the external USB USB device. In this case, connect the
external USB device can be unrec- device during playback in USB USB device directly to the multime-
ognizable. mode, the external USB device can dia terminal of the vehicle.
• When the formatted byte/sector set- be damaged or may malfunction. • If the USB device is divided by logi-
ting of External USB device is not Therefore, disconnect the external cal drives, only the music files on the
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then USB device when the audio is highest-priority drive are recog-
the device will not be recognized. turned off or in another mode. (e.g, nized by car audio.
Radio) • Devices such as MP3 Player/
• Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32. • Depending on the type and capacity Cellular phone/Digital camera can
of the external USB device or the be unrecognizable by standard USB
• USB devices without USB I/F type of files stored in the device, I/F.
authentication may not be recogniz- there is a difference in the time for
able. • Charging through the USB may not
recognition the device. be supported in some mobile
• Make sure the USB connection ter- • Do not use the USB device for pur- devices.
minal does not come in contact with poses other than playing music files.
the human body or other objects. • USB HDD or USB types liable to
• Playing videos through the USB is connection failures due to vehicle
• If you repeatedly connect or discon- not supported. vibrations are not supported. (i-stick
nect the USB device in a short peri- type)
od of time, it may break the device. • Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F • Some non-standard USB devices
(Continued) may lower performance or cause (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
trouble. be unrecognizable.
(Continued) (Continued)

4-28
(Continued) i Information (Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers - UsingiPod® Device • Some iPod® devices, such as the
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or iPhone®, can be connected through
external-HDD type devices can be iPod® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
unrecognizable. Apple inc. interface. The device must have
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI- • Some iPod® models may not sup- audio Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are port communication protocol and capability (such as for stereo head-
not recognizable. files may not play properly. phone Bluetooth® Wireless Technology).
Supported iPod® models : The device can play, but it will not
• The data in the USB memory may be controlled by the audio system.
be lost while using this audio. - iPhone® 3GS/4
Always back up important data on a - iPod® touch 1st~4th generation • To use iPod® features within the 4
personal storage device. audio mode, use the cable with
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation iPod® device.

Multimedia System
• Please avoid using USB - iPod® classic
memory products which • Skipping or improper operation
can be used as key • The order of search or playback of may occur depending on the charac-
chains or cellular phone songs in the iPod® can be different teristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
accessories as they could cause dam- from the order searched in the audio device.
age to the USB jack. Please make system. • If your iPhone® is connected to both
certain only to use plug type connec- • If the iPod® is disabled due to its the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
tor products. own malfunction, reset the iPod®. and USB, only iPod® mode will be
(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual) supported during Bluetooth® Audio
• An iPod® may not operate normally treaming. To use Bluetooth® Audio
on low battery. Streaming, disconnect iPod®/iPhone®
(Continued) cable.
(Continued)

4-29
Multimedia System

(Continued) i Information (Continued)


• When connecting iPod® with the - Using the Bluetooth® Wireless • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology fea-
iPod® Cable, fully insert the USB Technology Cellular Phone tures supported within the vehicle
connector side of the cable into the (if equipped) are as follows. Some features may
vehicle USB port. If not inserted not be supported depending on your
completely, communications between • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
the iPod® and audio may be inter- Handsfree refers to a device which device.
rupted. allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth® - Answering and placing Bluetooth®
• When adjusting the iPod® sound Wireless Technology mobile phones Wireless Technology Handsfree
settings and the audio system, the through the audio system. calls
audio sound of both devices may - Menu operation during call
overlap and may reduce or distort • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a (Switch to Private, Switch to call
the sound quality. waiting, Outgoing volume)
short distance, including hands-free
• Deactivate (turn off) the iPod® devices, stereo headsets, wireless - Download Call History
equalizer function when adjusting remote controllers, etc. For more
the audio system’s volume, and turn - Download Mobile Phone book
information, visit the Bluetooth®
off the audio system equalizer when - Phone book/Call History Auto
Wireless Technology website at
using the iPod® equalizer. Download
www.Bluetooth.com. Before using
• Disconnect the iPod® cable when not Bluetooth® Wireless Technology - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
using the iPod® with the vehicle audio features. device auto connection
audio system. Otherwise, iPod® may • The Bluetooth® word mark and - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
remain in accessory mode, and may logos are registered trademarks Audio
not work properly. owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and (Continued)
• Use an iPod®/iPhone® USB cable any use of such marks by Hyundai is
shorter than 1 meter in length, longer under license. Other trademarks
cables cannot be recognized. and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
(Continued)
4-30
(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)
• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless • Even if the phone supports • Placing the audio system within an
Technology related features of the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology, the electromagnetic environment may
audio system, refer your phone’s phone will not be found during result in noise interference.
User’s Manual for phone-side device searches if the phone has • Some cellular phones or other
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology been set to hidden state or the devices may cause interference noise
operations. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology or a malfunction to the audio sys-
• The phone must be paired to the power is turned off. Disable the hid- tem. In this case, storing the device
audio system to use Bluetooth® den state or turn on the Bluetooth® in a different location may resolve
Wireless Technology related fea- Wireless Technology power prior to the condition.
tures. searching/connecting with the car 4
audio system. • While a phone is connected through
• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
• You will not be able to use the

Multimedia System
Wireless Technology enabled mobile your phone may discharge quicker
phone will work only when the hands-free feature when your phone than usual for additional Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (in the car) is outside of the cellular Wireless Technology-related opera-
option within your mobile phone service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in an tions.
has been turned on. (Methods of underground location, in a moun-
tainous area, etc.). • If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
turning on the Bluetooth® Wireless tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®
Technology enabled feature may • If the cellular phone signal is poor Wireless Technology phone will be
differ depending on the mobile or the vehicle’s interior noise is too automatically connected. Even if
phone.) loud, it may be difficult to hear the you are outside, the Bluetooth®
• Do not use a cellular phone or per- other person’s voice during a call. Wireless Technology phone will be
form Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Do not place the phone near or automatically connected once you
settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while inside metallic objects, otherwise are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
driving. communications with Bluetooth® you do not want to automatically
(Continued) Wireless Technology system or cel- connect your Bluetooth® Wireless
lular service stations can be dis- Technology phone, try the following.
turbed. (Continued)
(Continued)

4-31
Multimedia System

(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)


1) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless 5) Delete all paired devices, pair and • Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
Technology feature in your mobile try again. supported in some mobile phones.
phone. • It is possible to pair up to five To learn more about mobile device
2) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth® Wireless Technology compatibility, visit http://www.
Technology feature in your car devices to the car system. hyundai.com/us/en/content/own-
audio system. ers/bluetooth.
• Phone contact names should be
- To turn off the Bluetooth® saved in English or they may not be • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Wireless Technology feature in displayed correctly. Handsfree is a feature that enables
your car audio system, go to drivers to practice safe driving.
• The Handsfree call volume and Connecting the car audio system
[SETUP/CLOCK] > [Phone] and quality may differ depending on the
[turn off] the Bluetooth® Wireless with a Bluetooth® Wireless
mobile phone. Technology phone allows the user to
Technology feature.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless conveniently make calls, receive
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Technology device can be connected calls, and manage the phone book.
connection may become intermit- at a time. Before using the Bluetooth®
tently disconnected in some mobile Wireless Technology, carefully read
phones. Follow these steps to try • In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition while talking through the contents of this user’s manual.
again.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless enabled handsfree call will result in
Technology function within the the call becoming disconnected.
mobile phone off/on and try again. (Switch the call back to your mobile
2) Turn the mobile phone power phone when starting the ignition.)
Off/On and try again. • If the mobile phone is not paired or
3) Completely remove the mobile connected, it is not possible to enter
phone battery, reboot, and then try Phone mode. Once a phone is paired
again. or connected, the guidance screen
4) Reboot the audio system and try will be displayed.
again. (Continued)
(Continued)
4-32
NOTICE i Information (Continued)
- Using Voice Recognition - During severe rain (heavy rains,
• Excessive use or operations windstorms)
while driving may lead to negli- (if equipped)
gent driving practices and be • When using the voice recognition • Phone related voice commands can
the cause of accidents. feature, only commands listed with- be used only when a Bluetooth®
in the user's manual are supported. Wireless Technology device is con-
• Do not operate the device exces- nected.
sively while driving. • Be aware that when the voice recog-
nition system is active, pressing any • When making calls by name, the
• Viewing the screen for pro- corresponding contact must be
longed periods of time while button other than the button ter-
minates voice recognition mode. downloaded and stored within the
driving is dangerous and may audio system. 4
lead to accidents. • For optimal voice recognition per-
formance, position your head below • After downloading the phone book,

Multimedia System
the microphone located above the it takes some time to convert the
driver’s seat and maintain proper phone book data into voice informa-
position when speaking voice com- tion. During this time, voice recogni-
mands. tion may not operate properly.
• Within the following situations, • Pressing and holding the button :
voice recognition may not function While holding the button, frequency
properly due to external sound. changes without stopping. When the
button is released, the system auto-
- When the windows and sunroof matically searches for the next fre-
are open quency from that point.
- When the blower AC/heater is set
to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
(Continued)

4-33
Multimedia System

Radio Mode Preset Selecting through manual search


Press the [1] ~ [6] button. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
With the Radio Mode Button • Short press : Plays the frequency adjust the radio frequency.
saved in the corresponding button.
• Press and hold : Pressing and MENU : Radio
holding the desired button from [1]
~ [6] will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected button
and sound a BEEP.

Scan
Seek Press the [SCAN] button.
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button. Within [MENU] button is the A.Store
• Short press : The broadcast fre-
• Short press : Automatically search- (Auto Store).
quency increases and previews
es for the next station. each broadcast for 5 seconds
• Press and hold : While holding the each. After scanning all frequen- A.Store (Auto Store) : [1] Button
button, frequency changes without cies, returns and plays the current Select A.Store (Auto Store) to save
stopping. When the button is broadcast frequency. frequencies with superior reception
released, the system automatically • Press and hold : Previews the to presets [1] ~ [6]. If no frequencies
searches for the next frequency broadcasts saved in Preset [1] ~ are received, then the most recently
from that point. [6] for 5 seconds each. received frequency will be broad-
cast.

4-34
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Satellite Radio reception factors : SiriusXM Satellite Radio service :
information (if equipped) To receive the satellite signal, your SiriusXM is a subscription-based
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio service that broad-
Satellite Radio channels : satellite radio antenna located on the casts music, sports, news and enter-
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof tainment programming to radio
3-month trial subscription to the provides the best location for an receivers, which are available for
SiriusXM Select package. You’ll get unobstructed, open view of the sky, a installation in motor vehicles or facto-
over 140 channels, including com- requirement of a satellite radio sys- ry installed, as well as for the home,
mercial-free music, plus all your tem. Like AM/FM, there are several portable and wireless devices, and
favorite sports, exclusive talk, enter- factors that can affect satellite radio through an Internet connection on a
tainment, and a selection of premium reception performance : personal computer. 4
programming. For more information • Antenna obstructions : For optimal Vehicles that are equipped with a
and a complete list of SiriusXM reception performance, keep the factory installed SiriusXM Satellite

Multimedia System
channels, visit siriusxm.com in the antenna clear of snow and ice Radio system include :
United States, siriusxm.ca in build-up and keep luggage and • Hardware and an introductory trial
Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888- other material as far away from the subscription term, which begins on
539-7474. antenna as possible. the date of sale or lease of the
• Terrain : Hills, mountains, tall build- vehicle.
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway • For a small upgrade fee, access to
overpasses, parking garages, SiriusXM music channels, and
dense tree foliage and thunder- other select channels over the
storms can interfere with your Internet using any computer con-
reception. nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.

4-35
Multimedia System

NOTE :
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.

4-36
SiriusXM Radio Mode Activation Seek
(if equipped) In order to extend or reactivate your Press the [SEEK TRACK] button.
SiriusXM Select subscription, you will • Short press : Select previous or
With the SiriusXM Satellite need to contact SiriusXM Customer next channel.
Radio Mode Button Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your 12-
digit RID (Radio Identification • Press and hold : Continuously
Number)/ESN (Electronic Serial move to previous or next channel.
Number) ready. To retrieve the • If the “Category” icon is displayed,
RID/ESN, turn on the radio, press the channels are changed within the
[RADIO]([XM]) button, and tune to current category.
channel zero. 4
Please note that the vehicle will need Scan
to be turned on, in SiriusXM mode, Press the [SCAN] button.

Multimedia System
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped and have an unobstructed view of
with a 3-month trial subscription to • Short press : Previews each broad-
the sky in order for the radio to cast for 5 seconds each.
SiriusXM so you have access to over receive the activation signal.
140 channels of music, information, • Press the [SCAN] button again to
and entertainment programming. continue listening to the current
frequency.
• If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

4-37
Multimedia System

Preset Tune
Press the [1] ~ [6] button • Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the
• Short press : Plays the channel channel number or scrolls catego-
saved in the corresponding button. ry list.
• Press and hold : Pressing and • Press TUNE knob : Selects the
holding the desired button from [1] menu.
Category ~ [6] will save the current broad-
cast to the selected button and Menu : SiriusXM Radio
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button. sound a BEEP.
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category i Information
that the current channel belongs to. - Troubleshooting
• In the Category List Mode, press 1. Antenna Error
the [CAT/FOLDER] button to navi- If this message is displayed, the
gate category list. antenna or antenna cable is broken Press the [MENU] button.
• Press the tune knob to select the or unplugged. Please consult with
lowest channel in the highlighted your Hyundai dealership.
category. Info (Information) : [1] Button
2. No Signal
• If channel is selected by selecting Displays the Artist/Song info of the
If this message is displayed, it current song.
category, then the “CATEGORY” means that the antenna is covered
icon is displayed at the top of the and that the SiriusXM Satellite
screen. Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.

4-38
Media Mode ■ USB Mode Repeat
While song (file) is playing  [RPT]
With the Media Mode Button button
Press the [MEDIA] button to change Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
the mode in the order of CD ➟ Music* mode : RPT on screen
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music* ➟ • To repeat one song (press the but-
BT Audio*. ton) : Repeats the current song.
* if equipped ■ My Music Mode (if equipped) MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RPT on
screen
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen. • To repeat folder (press the button
twice) : Repeats all files within the 4
■ Audio CD Mode current folder.

Multimedia System
Press the [RPT] button again to turn
off repeat.
* if equipped
The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
■ MP3 CD Mode The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.

4-39
Multimedia System

Random Changing Song/File Folder Search


While song (file) is playing  [RDM] While song (file) is playing  [SEEK (Only MP3 CD, USB mode)
button TRACK ∨] button While file is playing  [FOLDER ∧]
Audio CD, My Music* mode : RDM • Short press : Plays the current ([CAT/FOLDER ∧]) button
on screen song from the beginning. • Searches the next folder.
• Random (press the button) : Plays If the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button is While file is playing  [FOLDER ∨]
all songs in random order. pressed again within 2 seconds, the ([CAT/FOLDER ∨]) button
MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RDM on previous song is played. • Searches the parent folder.
screen • Press and hold : Rewinds the If a folder is selected by pressing the
• Folder Random (press the button) : song. TUNE knob, the first file within the
Plays all files within the current While song (file) is playing  [SEEK selected folder will be played.
folder in random order. TRACK ∧] button In iPod® mode, moves to the Parent
iPod® mode : ALL RDM on screen • Short press : Plays the next song. Folder.
• All Random (press the button) : • Press and hold : Fast forwards the
Plays all files in random order. song. Searching Songs/Files
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen • Turning TUNE knob : Searches for
• All Random (press the button Scan songs (files)
twice) : Plays all files in random While song (file) is playing  [SCAN] • Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
order. button selected song (file).
Press the [RDM] button again to turn • Short press : Scans all songs from
off random. the next song for 10 seconds each.
* if equipped • Press the [SCAN] button again to
turn off.
• The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod® mode.

4-40
MENU : Audio CD MENU : MP3 CD/USB All Random : [4] Button
Randomly play all songs within the
CD/USB.
Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information : [5] Button


Display information of the current
Press the Audio CD mode [MENU] Press the MP3 CD/USB mode song.
button to set the Repeat, Random, [MENU] button to set the Repeat, Press the [MENU] button to turn off
Information features. Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All info display. 4
Random, Information, and Copy fea-
tures.

Multimedia System
Repeat : [1] Button Copy : [6] Button (if equipped)
Repeat the current song. This is used to copy the current song
Repeat : [1] Button into My Music. You can play the
Press RPT again to turn off.
Repeat the current song. copied Music in My Music mode.
Random : [2] Button Press RPT again to turn off. If another button is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up ask-
Randomly play songs within the cur-
Folder Random : [2] Button ing you whether to cancel copying is
rent CD. displayed.
Press RDM again to turn off. Randomly play songs within the cur-
rent folder. If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
Information : [3] Button Press F.RDM again to turn off. while copying is in progress, copying
Display information of the current is canceled.
song. Folder Repeat : [3] Button Music will not be played while copy-
Press the [MENU] button to turn off Repeat songs within the current fold- ing is in progress.
info display. er.
Press F.RPT again to turn off.

4-41
Multimedia System

MENU : iPod® Information : [3] Button MENU : AUX


Displays information for the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.

Search : [4] Button


In iPod® mode, press the [MENU] Displays iPod® category list. AUX is used to play external MEDIA
button to set the Repeat, Random, While in iPod® category sublists, currently connected with the AUX
Information and Search features. press the [MENU] button to move up terminal.
to the parent category. AUX mode will automatically start
Repeat : [1] Button when an external device is connect-
Repeat the current song. ed with the AUX terminal.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off. If an external device is connected,
you can also press the [MENU] but-
ton to change to AUX mode.
Random : [2] Button AUX mode cannot be started unless
Plays all songs within the currently there is an external device connect-
playing category in random order. ed to the AUX terminal.
Press RDM again to turn off.
i Information - Using the AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.

4-42
MENU : My Music (if equipped) Delete Selection : [6] Button
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.

Delete : [4] Button


In My Music mode, press the Deletes currently playing file.
[MENU] button to set the Repeat, In the play screen, pressing delete
Random, Information, Delete, Delete will delete the currently playing song. 4
All and Delete Selection features. ➀ Select the songs you wish to
Deletes file from list. delete from the list.

Multimedia System
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
Repeat : [1] Button by using the TUNE knob.
Repeats the currently playing song. ➁ Press the [MENU] button and
Press RPT again to turn repeat off. select [Delete] from the menu to
delete the selected file.
Random : [2] Button
Plays all songs in random order. Delete All : [5] Button ➁ After selecting, press [MENU] but-
Press RDM again to turn random off. Deletes all songs in My Music. ton and select [Delete] from the
menu.
Information : [3] Button
Displays information for the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.

4-43
Multimedia System

i Information MENU : Bluetooth® Wireless


Technology Audio (if equipped) WARNING
- Using the My Music
(if equipped) If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® Distracted Driving
• Even if memory is available, a max- Wireless Technology audio will start
playing. Driving while distracted can
imum of 6,000 songs can be stored. result in a loss of vehicle con-
• The same song can be copied up to Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones. trol that may lead to an acci-
1,000 times. dent, severe personal injury,
• Memory info can be checked in the and death. The driver’s primary
System menu of Setup. responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
• Play/Stop : vehicle or which are not permis-
Press the TUNE knob to play and sible by law should never be
pause the current song. used during operation of the
vehicle.
The title/artist info may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
When it is not supported, no title or
artist will be displayed.
• Previous/Next song
Press [SEEK TRACK] button to play
previous or next song.
The previous song/next song/play/
pause functions may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.

4-44
Phone Mode (if equipped) (4) MUTE Pairing using the Steering
Mutes audio volume. wheel controls
Making a call using the Steering (5) CALL
wheel controls Places and transfers calls.
• Check call history and making calls
- Shortly press the [CALL] button on
the steering wheel controls.
- The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen. 1. Press the [CALL] button on the
- Press the [CALL] button again to steering wheel controls. 4
connect a call to the selected num- 2. Select [OK] button to enter the

Multimedia System
ber. Pair Phone screen.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
❈ The actual features in the vehicle - Press and hold the [CALL] button
may differ from the illustration. on the steering wheel controls.
(1) VOICE RECOGNITION - The most recently called number is
Activates voice recognition*. redialed.
(2) MODE (6) END • Vehicle Name : Name of device as
Press the button to change audio Ends calls or cancels functions. shown when searching from your
source. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1* ➟ XM2* ❈ If call history does not exist, a device
➟ XM3* ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ • Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
screen asking whether to down-
AUX ➟ My Music* ➟ BT Audio*. load call history is displayed. (The device
(3) VOLUME +/- download feature may not be sup-
Raises or lowers speaker volume. ported in some mobile phones)
*if equipped
4-45
Multimedia System

3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android TM MENU : Phone
Technology device (i.e. Mobile and Blackberry® phones) may offer
Phone), search and select your an option to allow acceptance of all
car audio system. future Bluetooth® connection
requests by default. Visit http://www.
hyundaiusa.com/Bluetooth for addi-
❈ SSP : Secure Simple Pairing tional information on pairing your
Non SSP supported device : Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone,
4. After a few moments, a screen is and to view a phone compatibility list.
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
displayed where the passkey is
device connected, press the
entered. Enter the passkey “0000”
[PHONE] button to display the
to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless
Phone menu screen.
Technology device with the car
audio system.
Favorites : [1] Button
Up to 20 frequently used contacts
can be saved for easy access.
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are Call History : [2] Button
currently connected, pressing the
[CALL] button on the steering Displays the call history list screen.
wheel control displays the following If you select the [History] button but
SSP supported device : screen. Select [Pair] button to pair there is no call history data, a prompt
4. After a few moments, a screen is a new device or select [Connect] to is displayed which asks to download
displayed that has the 6 digit connect a previously paired device. call history data.
passkey from any nearby SSP
device that is found. Check the
passkey on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.

4-46
Contacts : [3] Button i Information
Displays the Contacts list screen.
• When an incoming call pop-up is
If you select the [Contacts] button but displayed, most Audio and SETUP
there is no contacts data stored, a features are disabled. Only the call
prompt is displayed which asks to volume will operate.
download contacts data.
• The telephone number may not be
Answering a Call properly displayed in some mobile
Setup : [4] Button Answering a call with a Bluetooth® phones.
Displays Phone related settings. Wireless Technology device connect-
This feature may not be supported in ed will display the following screen. 4
some mobile phones. For more infor- To accept the call, press [CALL] but-
mation on download support, refer to

Multimedia System
ton on the steering wheel while the
your mobile phone’s user manual. call is incoming.
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number

4-47
Multimedia System

Favorites Call History Contacts


Press the [PHONE] button  Select Press the [PHONE] button  Select Press the [PHONE] button  Select
[Fav] [History] [Contacts]
• Saved Favorite contact : Connects A list of incoming, outgoing and The list of saved phone book entries
call upon selection. missed calls is displayed. is displayed.
• To add Favorite : Downloaded con- • Call history may not be saved in
tacts can be saved as Favorite. the call history list in some mobile NOTE:
• To save Favorite, contacts should phones.
Find a contact in alphabetical
be downloaded. • Calls received with hidden caller ID order, press the [MENU] button.
will not be saved in the call history
• Contact saved in Favorites will not list.
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the • Calling through the call history is
phone. To update Favorites, delete not possible when there is no call
the Favorite and create a new history stored or a Bluetooth®
Favorite. Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not stored
in Call History.

4-48
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down- Voice Recognition Mode
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the con- (if equipped)
phone can be downloaded into the tact download feature has been
car contacts. Contacts that have turned off within the Bluetooth®
been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In Using Voice Recognition
be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may
• Mobile phone contacts are man- require device authorization upon
aged separately for each paired attempting to download contacts. If
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology downloading does not normally
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- occur, check the Bluetooth®
tacts each). Previously down- Wireless Technology device set-
loaded data is maintained even if tings or for notifications on the 4
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology screen. Short press the button on the

Multimedia System
device has been disconnected. • The contacts download feature steering wheel controls. Say a com-
(However, the contacts and call may not be supported in some mand
history saved to the phone will be mobile phones. For more informa- If prompt feedback is in [On], then
deleted if a paired phone is delet- tion of supported Bluetooth® the system will say "Please say a
ed.) devices and function support, refer command after the beep (BEEP)"
• It is possible to download contacts to your phone’s user manual. • If prompt feedback is in [On] mode,
during Bluetooth® streaming audio. then the system will only say
• When downloading contacts, the "(BEEP)"
icon will be displayed within the • To change Prompt Feedback
status bar. [On]/[Off], go to [SETUP/CLOCK]
 [System]  [Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.

4-49
Multimedia System

Contact List Best Practices Re-starting Voice Recognition Voice Recognition and Phone
• Use full names vs. short or single While system waits for a command Contact Tips :
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.  Short press the button on the The Hyundai Voice Recognition
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs. steering wheel controls System may have difficulty under-
“Home”) The command wait state is immedi- standing some accents or uncom-
• Avoid using special characters or ately ended and the beep tone will mon names. When using Voice
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.) sound. After the “Beep”, say the Recognition to place a call, speak in
voice command. a moderate tone, with clear pronun-
• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case of
ciation.
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
Ending Voice Recognition To maximize the use of Voice
• Spell words completely, no abbre-
Recognition, consider these guide-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs. While Voice Recognition is operating lines when storing contacts :
“Dr. Goodman”)  Press and hold the button on
the steering wheel controls. • Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
Skipping Prompt Messages • While using voice command, “Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
While prompt message is being stat- pressing any steering wheel con- “Home”)
ed  Short press the button on trols or a different button will end
voice command. • Avoid using special characters or
the steering wheel controls hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
The prompt message is immediately • When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or • Avoid using acronyms (“In Case of
ended and the beep tone will sound. Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
After the “Beep”, say the voice com- “end” to end voice command.
mand. • When the system is waiting for a • Spell words completely, no abbre-
voice command, press and hold viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
the button on the steering “Dr. Goodman”)
wheel to end voice command.

4-50
Illustration on Using Voice Recognition
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
Starting Voice Recognition You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
Short press the button : You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like
the beep (BEEP) Beep~ ‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user’s
More Help manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help 4
Ending Voice Recognition
Here are some examples of mode commands.
Short press the button :

Multimedia System
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Please say a command after
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
the beep (BEEP)
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’. Contacts
You can find more detailed commands in the user’s
manual.
Please say a command after the beep. Please say the contact name you want to call.

Skipping Voice Recognition


Cancel
Short press the button :
Please say a... while guidance message is being stated

Short press the button :


(BEEP)
More Help

4-51
Multimedia System

Voice Command List


Common Commands
These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command Function Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used Call History Displays the Call History screen.
anywhere in the system. Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used command, say the name of a contact saved in the
within the current mode. Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts. Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this
Ex) Call “John Smith” command, you can say the number that you want
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as to call.
on Mobile “Mobile” in Contacts. Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as and Bluetooth® connections
in Office “Office” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office • When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as XM3)
at Home “Home” in Contacts
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
Ex) Call “John Smith” at Home most recently played radio screen.
Radio
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as • When currently listening to the FM radio, main-
on Other “Other” in Contacts tains the current state.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Other • When listening to a different mode, displays the
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. most recently played FM screen.
After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“Call FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute cor-
responding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

4-52
Command Function Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
FM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. device.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding fre- Mute Mutes the sound.
quency.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding fre-
quency.
XM (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the
4
current state.

Multimedia System
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
XM Channel
Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays music on the CD.
USB Plays music on the USB device.
iPod® Plays music on the iPod®.
My Music Plays music saved in My Music.

4-53
Multimedia System

FM/AM Radio Commands Satellite Radio Commands


Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation. Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite
Command Function Radio.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Command Function
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current present broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.

4-54
Audio CD Commands MP3 CD/USB Commands
Commands available during Audio CD operation. Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.
Command Function Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order. order.
Repeat Repeats the current track. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order. order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. Information Displays the information screen of the current file. 4
Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.

Multimedia System
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.

4-55
Multimedia System

iPod® Commands My Music Commands


Commands available during iPod® operation. Commands available during My Music operation.
Command Function Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current cate- Random Randomly plays all saved files.
gory. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
order. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.
order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an addi-
tional confirmation process.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands


Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone opera-
tion Command Operation.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.

4-56
Setup Mode Sound Menu
Use the TUNE knob to scroll through
Setup menus. When the desired item
is highlighted, press the knob to
select it.

Display Menu Media Display


When playing an MP3 file, select the Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button 
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ Select [Sound]
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’. 4

Multimedia System
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button 
Select [Display]

Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up]  Changes [On]
selection mode
• During On state, press the [RADIO]
([FM/AM], [XM], [FM]) or [MENU]
button to display the mode change
pop up screen.

4-57
Multimedia System

Position Voice Recognition Volume


This menu allows you to set the (if equipped)
Fader, Balance. Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Position] Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]
• Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
Tone restore the parent menu.
This menu allows you to set the • Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
Bass, Middle, Treble. fader and balance.
Select [Tone] • Default : Restores default settings.
• Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will restore Speed Dependent Volume Control
the parent menu. This feature is used to automatically
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the control the volume level according to
sound tone. the speed of the vehicle.
• Default : Restores default settings. Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] 
Set [Off/On]

4-58
Clock Menu

Clock Settings Calendar Settings


This menu is used to set the time. This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Clock Settings] Select [Calendar Settings]
Adjust the number currently in focus Adjust the number currently in focus 4
to set the [hour] and press the TUNE to make the settings and press the

Multimedia System
knob to set the [minute] and TUNE knob to move to the next set-
[AM/PM]. ting.
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
 Select [Clock] Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
WARNING hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format]  Set 12Hr/24Hr.
Clock Setting Distraction
Adjusting the clock setting Clock Display when Power is OFF
while driving can result in a loss Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)]  Set
of vehicle control that may lead [On/Off]
to an accident, severe personal
injury, and death. • [On] : Displays time/date on screen
• [Off] : Turn off.

4-59
Multimedia System

Phone Menu (if equipped) - Downloading Mobile Contacts • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Technology device becomes dis-
device auto connection connected due to being out of
communication range, turning the
- Bluetooth® Audio Streaming device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Wireless Technology communication
Technology devices can be paired error, corresponding Bluetooth®
to the Car Handsfree system. Wireless Technology devices are
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless automatically searched and recon-
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button nected.
Technology device can be con-
 Select [Phone] nected at a time. • If the system becomes unstable
• Other devices cannot be paired while due to communication errors
Pair Phone between the car Handsfree and the
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The following steps are the same as device is connected. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
those described in the section device, reset the device by turning
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
“Pairing on the Steering wheel con- off and back on again. Upon reset-
Handsfree and Bluetooth® audio
trols” on the previous page. ting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
related features are supported.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, the system will be restored.
• Bluetooth® related operations are
features supported within the vehi- • After pairing is complete, a con-
possible only within devices that
cle are as follows. Some features tacts download request is sent
support Handsfree or audio fea-
may not be supported depending once to the mobile phone. Some
tures, such as a Bluetooth®
on your Bluetooth® Wireless mobile phones may require confir-
Wireless Technology mobile phone
Technology device. mation upon receiving a download
or a Bluetooth® audio device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree request, ensure your mobile phone
calls accepts the connection. Refer to
- Operations during a call (Switch your phones user’s manual for
to Private, Switch to call waiting, additional information regarding
MIC on/off) phone pairing and connections.
- Downloading Call History

4-60
Phone List
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
 Select [Phone]  Select [Phone
List] 4
1) Connected Phone : Device that is

Multimedia System
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is • Connecting a Device • Disconnecting a Device
paired but not connected From the paired phone list, select the From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and currently connected device and
select [Connect]. select [Disconnect] button.

4-61
Multimedia System

• Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The “Change Priority” feature is used
to set the connection priority of From the paired phone list, select
paired phones. • Deleting a Device
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change From the paired phone list, select the
Priority] button from the Menu. The device you want to delete and select
selected device will be changed to [Delete] button.
the highest priority. - When deleting the currently con-
Priority icon will be displayed when nected device, the device will auto-
the selected phone is set as a priori- matically be disconnected to pro-
ty phone. ceed with the deleting process.
- If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
- To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.

4-62
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/Disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
Pairing a New Device selected phone
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button 4) Return : Moves to the previous
 Select [Phone]  Select [Pair screen
Phone] • To learn more about whether your 4
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone supports contact

Multimedia System
devices can be paired with the audio downloads, refer to your mobile
system. phone user’s manual.
Viewing Paired Phone List
For more information, refer to the • The contacts for only the connect-
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
ed phone can be downloaded
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless  Select [Phone]  Select [Phone
Technology. List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Connection” section within Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.

4-63
Multimedia System

Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume


Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
 Select [Phone]  Select [Contacts  Select [Phone]  Select
Download] [Outgoing Volume]
As the contacts are downloaded Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgo-
from the mobile phone, a download ing volume level.
progress bar is displayed. • While on a call, the volume can be Turning Bluetooth System Off
• Upon downloading phone con- changed by using the [SEEK Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
TRACK] button.  Select [Phone]  Select
[Bluetooth System Off]
• This feature may not be supported Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
in some mobile phones. is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
• Voice Recognition may not operate Technology related features will not
while contacts are being down- be supported within the audio sys-
loaded. tem.
• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[SETUP/CLOCK]  [Phone] and
select “Yes”.

4-64
System Menu Prompt Feedback (if equipped)
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback]  Set
through TUNE knob
Memory Information • On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
Displays currently used memory and instructions during voice command
total system memory. operation.
Select [Memory Information]  [OK] • Off : This mode is for expert users 4
The currently used memory is dis- and omits some information during

Multimedia System
played on the left side while the total voice command operation. (When
system memory is displayed on the using Expert mode, guidance
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button right side. instructions can be heard through
 Select [System] the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

4-65
Multimedia System

iPod® is a registered trademark of Sirius, XM and all related marks


Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital and logos are trademarks of Sirius
device sold separately. The XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
Bluetooth® word mark and logos trademark of Google, Inc.
are registered trademarks owned BlackBerry is a registered trade-
by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any mark of Research In Motion
use of such marks by Hyundai is Limited (RIM). All other marks,
Language under license. SiriusXM services channel names and logos are the
require a subscription sold sepa- property of their respective own-
This menu is used to set the display rately, or as a package, by Sirius ers. All rights reserved.
and voice recognition language. XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
Select [Language] tinue service after your trial, the
The system will reboot after the lan- subscription plan you choose will
guage is changed. automatically renew thereafter
• Language support by region and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method
English, Français, Español at then-current rates. Fees and
taxes apply. To cancel you must
call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.
See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.sir-
iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available
only in the 48 contiguous states,
DC and Puerto Rico (with cover-
age limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.

4-66
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one ormore of the following measures : 4

Multimedia System
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution : Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your
authority to operate this equipment.

4-67
Multimedia System

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body. This transmitter must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so
by the FCC.

4-68
Driving your vehicle

Before Driving ........................................................5-4 Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-41


Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-4 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
Before Starting ..................................................................5-4 LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-42
Ignition Switch........................................................5-6 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-45
Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6 Limitations of the System.............................................5-48
Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)...............5-49
Manual Transmission ...........................................5-16 System Setting and Activation.....................................5-49
Manual Transmission Operation..................................5-16 AEB Warning Message and System Control ............5-51
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-18 AEB Front Radar Sensor...............................................5-54
Automatic Transmission ......................................5-20 System Malfunction .......................................................5-55
Automatic Transmission Operation.............................5-20 Limitations of the System.............................................5-56
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-25 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-61
Braking System ....................................................5-27 LKAS Operation ...............................................................5-62 5
Power Brakes ...................................................................5-27 Limitations of the System.............................................5-66
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ..........................................5-28 LKAS Malfunction ...........................................................5-67
Rear drum brakes ...........................................................5-28 LKAS Function Change ..................................................5-68
Parking Brake...................................................................5-28 Cruise Control.......................................................5-70
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-30 Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-70
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-33
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-36
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-37
Good Braking Practices.................................................5-38
Drive Mode Integrated Control System ............5-39
Smart Cruise Control System .............................5-75
To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart
Cruise Control...................................................................5-76
To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-77
Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-77
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance .............................................................................5-82
SCC Front Radar Sensor................................................5-84
Limitations of the System.............................................5-86
Special Driving Conditions ..................................5-92
Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-92
Rocking the Vehicle ........................................................5-92
Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-93
5 Driving at Night................................................................5-93
Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-94
Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-94
Highway Driving...............................................................5-95
Winter Driving ......................................................5-96
Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-96
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-98
Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-100
Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-101
Trailer Towing.....................................................5-105
WARNING
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. 5
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only

Driving your vehicle


long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the trunk open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

5-3
Driving your vehicle

BEFORE DRIVING
Before Entering the Vehicle Before Starting
WARNING
• Be sure all windows, outside mir- • Make sure the hood, the trunk, and
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 ror(s), and outside lights are clean the doors are securely closed and
WARNING and unobstructed. locked.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice. • Adjust the position of the seat and
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
• Visually check the tires for uneven steering wheel.
ety of automobile components
including components found in wear and damage. • Adjust the inside and outside
the interior furnishings in a • Check under the vehicle for any rearview mirrors.
vehicle, contain or emit harmful sign of leaks. • Verify all the lights work.
chemicals known to the State of • Be sure there are no obstacles • Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
California to cause cancer and behind you if you intend to back up. passengers have fastened their
birth defects and reproductive seatbelts.
harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and cer- • Check the gauges and indicators in
tain products of components the instrument panel and the mes-
contain or emit chemicals sages on the instrument display
known to the State of California when the ignition switch is in the
to cause cancer and birth ON position.
defects or other reproductive • Check that any items you are car-
harm. rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.

5-4
WARNING WARNING (Continued)
You are much more likely to have
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS NEVER drink or take drugs and a serious accident if you drink or
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol- drive. take drugs and drive. If you are
lowing precautions: Drinking or taking drugs and driv- drinking or taking drugs, don't
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt. ing is dangerous and may result drive. Do not ride with a driver
All passengers must be prop- in an accident and SERIOUS who has been drinking or taking
erly belted whenever the vehi- INJURY or DEATH. drugs. Choose a designated driv-
cle is moving. For more infor- Drunk driving is the number er or call a taxi.
mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in one contributor to the highway
chapter 2. death toll each year. Even a
• Always drive defensively. small amount of alcohol will
Assume other drivers or pedes- affect your reflexes, percep-
trians may be careless and tions and judgment. Just one 5
make mistakes. drink can reduce your ability to

Driving your vehicle


• Stay focused on the task of respond to changing conditions
driving. Driver distraction can and emergencies and your reac-
cause accidents. tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of Driving while under the influ-
you. ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)

5-5
Driving your vehicle

IGNITION SWITCH
Key Ignition Switch
WARNING
WARNING NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS while the vehicle is in motion
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol- except in an emergency. This
lowing precautions: will result in the engine turning
• NEVER allow children or any off and loss of power assist for
person who is unfamiliar with the steering and brake systems.
the vehicle to touch the igni- This may lead to loss of direc-
tion switch or related parts. tional control and braking func-
Unexpected and sudden vehi- OAD055082L
tion, which could cause an acci-
cle movement can occur. Whenever the front door is opened, dent.
• NEVER reach through the the ignition switch will illuminate, pro- Before leaving the driver's seat,
steering wheel for the ignition vided the ignition switch is not in the always make sure the shift lever
switch, or any other control, ON position. The light will go off is in 1st gear (for manual trans-
while the vehicle is in motion. immediately when the ignition switch mission vehicle) or P (Park, for
The presence of your hand or is turned on or go off after about 30 automatic transmission vehicle)
arm in this area may cause a seconds when the door is closed. (if position, apply the parking
loss of vehicle control result- equipped) brake, and turn ignition switch
ing in an accident. to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.

5-6
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Action Notice
Position
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the
key in at the ACC position and turn the key towards the
LOCK position.
LOCK The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
(The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position for auto-
matic transmission vehicles)

Electrical accessories are usable.


ACC The steering wheel unlocks.
5

Driving your vehicle


This is the normal key position when the engine has Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when
started. the engine is not running in order to prevent the battery
ON All features and accessories are usable. from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the
ignition switch from ACC to ON.

To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START The engine will crank until you release the key.
START position. The switch returns to the ON position when you
let go of the key.

5-7
Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine Vehicle with automatic transmission: NOTICE


1. Make sure the parking brake is
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
WARNING applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P • Do not hold the ignition key in
Always wear appropriate shoes (Park). the START position for more
when operating your vehicle. than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
3. Depress the brake pedal. seconds before trying again.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
4. Turn the ignition switch to the • Do not push or tow your vehicle
heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-
START position. Hold the key to start the engine.
flops, etc., may interfere with
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
your ability to use the brake and
engine starts and release it.
accelerator pedals.
i Information
Vehicle with manual transmission: • It is best to maintain a moderate
1. Make sure the parking brake is engine speed until the vehicle engine
applied. comes up to normal operating tem-
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu- perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
tral. acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als. • Whether the engine is cold or warm,
always start the vehicle with your
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
START position. Hold the key
depress the accelerator while start-
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine starts and release it.
engine while warming it up.

5-8
Engine Start/Stop Button (Continued)
WARNING
This may lead to loss of direc-
To turn the engine off in an tional control and braking
emergency: function, which could cause
Press and hold the Engine an accident.
Start/Stop button for more than • Before leaving the driver's
two seconds OR rapidly press seat, always make sure the
and release the Engine Start/ shift lever is in the P (Park)
Stop button three times (within position, set the parking
three seconds). brake, press the Engine Start/
If the vehicle is still moving, you Stop button to the OFF posi-
can restart the engine without tion, and take the Smart Key
OAD055001 depressing the brake pedal by with you. Unexpected vehicle
Whenever the front door is opened, pressing the Engine Start/Stop movement may occur if these 5
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu- button with the shift lever in the precautions are not followed.

Driving your vehicle


minate and will go off 30 seconds N (Neutral) position. • NEVER reach through the
after the door is closed. steering wheel for the Engine
Start/Stop button or any other
control while the vehicle is in
WARNING WARNING motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area may
To reduce risk of serious injury • NEVER press the Engine Start/ cause a loss of vehicle control
or death, NEVER allow children Stop button while the vehicle resulting in an accident.
or any person who is unfamiliar is in motion except in an emer-
with the vehicle to touch the gency. This will result in the
Engine Start/Stop button or engine turning off and loss of
related parts. Unexpected and power assist for the steering
sudden vehicle movement can and brake systems.
occur. (Continued)

5-9
Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions


- Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position Action Notice

OFF To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and


then press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Not illuminated
ACC Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
button is in the OFF position without depress- ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-
ing the clutch pedal. tery power will turn off automatically to prevent
Electrical accessories are usable. the battery from discharging.

Orange indicator

5-10
- Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position Action Notice

ON Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
in the ACC position without depressing the the ON position for more than one hour, the
clutch pedal. battery power will turn off automatically to
The warning lights can be checked before prevent the battery from discharging.
the engine is started.

5
Blue indicator

Driving your vehicle


START To start the engine, depress the clutch and If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
brake pedals and press the Engine Start/ without depressing the clutch pedal, the
Stop button with the shift lever in neutral. engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF → ACC → ON → OFF

Not illuminated

5-11
Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions


- Vehicle with automatic transmission
Button Position Action Notice
OFF To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the
OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

ACC Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
button is in the OFF position without depress- ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-
ing the brake pedal. tery power will turn off automatically to prevent
Electrical accessories are usable. the battery from discharging.

5-12
- Vehicle with automatic transmission
Button Position Action Notice
ON Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
in the ACC position without depressing the the ON position when the engine is not run-
brake pedal. ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.

START To start the engine, depress the brake pedal If you press the Engine Start/Stop button with-
5
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with out depressing the brake pedal, the engine

Driving your vehicle


the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N does not start and the Engine Start/Stop but-
(Neutral) position. ton changes as follows:
For your safety, start the engine with the shift OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
lever in the P (Park) position. However, the engine may start if you depress
the brake pedal within 0.5 second after press-
ing the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF
position.

5-13
Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine i Information Vehicle with manual transmission:


1. Always carry the smart key with
• The engine will start by pressing the
WARNING Engine Start/Stop button, only when
you.
the smart key is in the vehicle. 2. Make sure the parking brake is
• Always wear appropriate shoes applied.
when operating your vehicle. • Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from the driver, 3. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
Unsuitable shoes, such as the engine may not start. tral.
high heels, ski boots, sandals, 4. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
flip-flops, etc., may interfere • When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any als.
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals. door is open, the system checks for 5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
the smart key. If the smart key is not ton.
• Do not start the vehicle with the in the vehicle, the " " indicator
accelerator pedal depressed. will blink and the warning "Key not
The vehicle can move and lead in vehicle" will come on and if all Vehicle with automatic transmission:
to an accident. doors are closed, the chime will also 1. Always carry the smart key with
• Wait until the engine rpm is sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the you.
normal. The vehicle may sud- smart key in the vehicle when using 2. Make sure the parking brake is
denly move if the brake pedal the ACC position or if the vehicle applied.
is released when the rpm is engine is ON. 3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
high.
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.

5-14
i Information NOTICE
• Do not wait for the engine to warm To prevent damage to the vehicle:
up while the vehicle remains station- When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
ary. Start driving at moderate you can't start the engine normal-
engine speeds. (Steep accelerating ly. Replace the fuse with a new
and decelerating should be avoided.) one. If you are not able to replace
• Always start the vehicle with your the fuse, you can start the engine
foot on the brake pedal. Do not by pressing and holding the
depress the accelerator while start- Engine Start/Stop button for 10
ing the vehicle. Do not race the seconds with the Engine Start/
engine while warming it up. Stop button in the ACC position. OAD055002
Do not press the Engine Start/Stop
NOTICE button for more than 10 seconds i Information
except when the stop lamp fuse is If the smart key battery is weak or the 5
To prevent damage to the vehicle: blown. smart key does not work correctly,

Driving your vehicle


• If the engine stalls while you are For your safety always depress you can start the engine by pressing
in motion, do not attempt to the brake pedal before starting the the Engine Start/Stop button with the
move the shift lever to the P engine. smart key in the direction of the pic-
(Park) position. ture above.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.

5-15
Driving your vehicle

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Manual Transmission To shift to R (Reverse), make sure
Operation the vehicle has completely stopped,
and then move the shift lever to neu-
The manual transmission has 6 for-
tral before moving into R (Reverse).
ward gears. The transmission is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower When you've come to a complete
gear is easily accomplished. stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear
or R (Reverse):
WARNING 1. Put the shift lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal.
Before leaving the driver's seat, 2. Depress the clutch pedal, and
always make sure the shift lever then shift into first or R (Reverse)
The shift lever can be moved without is in 1st gear when the vehicle is
pressing the button (1).
gear.
parked on a uphill and in R
The button (1) must be pressed while (Reverse) on a downhill, set the
moving the shift lever to R (Reverse). parking brake, and place the NOTICE
OAD055004 ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF During cold weather, shifting may
position. Unexpected vehicle be difficult until the transmission
movement may occur if these lubricant has warmed up.
precautions are not followed.

5-16
Using the clutch Downshifting
The clutch pedal should be
CAUTION Down shift to a lower gear when
depressed all the way before: To prevent unnecessary wear or slowing down in heavy traffic or driv-
- Starting the engine damage to the clutch: ing up a steep hill to prevent high
engine loads.
The engine will not start without • Do not rest your foot on the
depressing the clutch pedal. clutch pedal while driving. Also, downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling help reaccelerate
- Shifting into gear, up shifting to the • Do not hold the vehicle with the vehicle when you need to
next higher gear, or down shifting the clutch on an incline, while increase your speed.
to the next lower gear. waiting for the traffic light, etc.
When the vehicle is going downhill,
• Always depress the clutch downshifting helps maintain safe
When releasing the clutch pedal, pedal down fully to prevent speed by providing brake power from
release it slowly. The clutch pedal noise or damage. the engine and results in less wear
should always be released while • Do not start with the 2nd (sec- on the brakes. 5
driving. ond) gear engaged except
when you start on a slippery

Driving your vehicle


road.

5-17
Driving your vehicle

NOTICE Good Driving Practices • Exercise extreme caution when


• Never take the vehicle out of gear driving on a slippery surface. Be
To prevent damage to the engine, especially careful when braking,
clutch and transmission: and coast down a hill. This is
extremely dangerous. accelerating or shifting gears. On a
• When downshifting from 5th slippery surface, an abrupt change
gear to 4th gear, be careful not to • Don't "ride" the brakes. This can in vehicle speed can cause the
inadvertently push the shift cause the brakes and related parts drive wheels to lose traction and
lever sideways engaging the 2nd to overheat and malfunction. may cause loss of vehicle control
gear. A drastic downshift may When you are driving down a long resulting in an accident
cause the engine speed to hill, slow down and shift to a lower
increase to the point the gear. Engine braking will help slow WARNING
tachometer will enter the red- down the vehicle.
zone and may cause engine • Slow down before shifting to a Do not use the engine brake
damage. lower gear. This will help avoid (shifting from a higher gear to
• Do not downshift more than two over-revving the engine, which can lower gear) rapidly on slippery
gear at a time or downshift the cause damage. roads. The vehicle may slip
gear when the engine is running • Slow down when you encounter causing an accident.
at high speed (5,000 RPM or cross winds. This gives you much
higher). better control of your vehicle.
Such down shifting may damage • Be sure the vehicle is completely
the engine, clutch and the trans- stopped before you shift into R
mission. (Reverse) to prevent damage to
the transmission.

5-18
WARNING (Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS leaves the roadway, do not
INJURY or DEATH: steer sharply. Instead, slow
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. down before pulling back into
In a collision, an unbelted the travel lanes.
occupant is significantly more • HYUNDAI recommends you
likely to be seriously injured follow all posted speed limits.
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering 5
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,

Driving your vehicle


sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over